PCS-921 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R1.00 (X)

PCS-921
Breaker Failure Protection

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection i

Date: 2011-04-20
Preface
DANGER!
It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
WARNING!
It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION!
It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous
ii PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-04-20
Preface
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION!
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed
 Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
Copyright
Version: R1.00 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China
P/N: Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208
Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com
Copyright © NR 2011. All rights reserved Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection iii

Date: 2011-04-20
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Meaurement and Recording

Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module.
7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce how to make system configuration, function configuration, binary input and binary output
configuration, LED indicator configuration and programming logic through PCS-PC software.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
iv PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-04-20
Preface
11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
&
AND gate
≥1
OR gate
Comparator
BI
Binary signal via opto-coupler
EBI
Enabling binary input, an input via opto-coupler for function enabling
VEBI
Virtual enabling binary signal, a signal for enabling function via
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection v

Date: 2011-04-20
Preface
communication media by software tool
SET I>
Input signal from comparator with setting
EN
Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
SIG
Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
OTH
Input of other signal
XXX
Output signal
Timer
t
t
Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
10ms 0ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (0ms), non-settable]
[XXX] 0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
0ms [XXX]
Timer (delay dropoff, settable)
[XXX] [XXX]
Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)
IDMT
Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
---xxx is the symbol
vi PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Features ........................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Order Information............................................................................................ 1-3
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921..............................................................................1-1
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-a

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
The PCS-921 is a digital breaker protection device and can be applied for all kinds of busbar
arrangement. By default, breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection, dead zone protection,
pole discrepancy protection and automatic reclosing function is taken as the standard function of
PCS-921.
PCS-921 supports configurable binary inputs, binary outputs and IEC 61850 protocol.
Bus 1
PCS-921
52
Line 1 50BF 62PD 50/51G 50/51P
50DZ 25 79
52
Line 2
52
Bus 2
Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921
No. Function ANSI

1. Breaker failure protection 50BF
2. Pole discrepancy protection 62PD
3. Two stages earth-fault protection 50/51G
4. Two stages overcurrent protection 50/51P
5. Dead zone protection 50DZ
6. Synchro-checking 25
7. Auto- reclosing 79
1.2 Function
1. Protection Function
 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
 Pole discrepancy protection (62PD)
 Dead zone protection (50DZ)
 Two stages overcurrent protection (50/51P)
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-1

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction
 Two stages earth-fault protection (50/51G)
2. Logic
 User programmable logic
3. Additional function
 VT circuit supervision(VTS)
 CT circuit supervision(CTS)
 Self diagnostic
 DC power supply supervision
 Voltage and current drift auto regulation
 Auto-reclosing (79)
 Synchro-checking (25)
 Event Recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events and 1024 device logs.
 Disturbance recorder including 64 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)
 Clock synchronization
– PPS(RS-485)
– IRIG-B(RS-485)
– PPM(DIN)
– SNTP(PTP)
– IEEE1588
– SNTP(BC)
– PPS(DIN)
4. Monitoring
 Number of circuit breaker operation (single-phase tripping, three-phase tripping and

reclosing)
 Frequency
5. Communication
 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol or DNP3.0 protocol
 1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization
 Up to 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of plug-in MON module), IEC 61850, or
1-2 PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 over TCP/IP
 Up to 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface or SC interface, depend on the chosen type
of plug-in MON module)
 GOOSE communication function (optional plug-in module)
6. User Interface
 Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.
 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting
 1 RS-232 or RS-485 rear ports for printer
 Language switchover – English+ selected language
 Auxiliary software - PCSPC
1.3 Features
 The intelligent device integrated with protection, control and monitor provides powerful
protection function, flexible protection configuration, user programmable logic and
configurable binary input and binary output, which can meet with various application
requirements.
 High-performance hardware platform and modularized design, MCU (management control

unit)＋DSP (digital signal processor). MCU manages general fault detector element and DSP
manages protection and metering. Their data acquisition system is completely independent in
electronic circuit. DC power supply of output relay is controlled by the operation of fault
detector element operates, this prevents maloperation due to error from ADC or damage of
any apparatus.
 Flexible automatic reclosure supports various initiation modes and check modes
 Multiple setting groups with password protection
 Powerful PC tool software can fulfill protection function configuration, modify setting and
waveform analysis.
1.4 Order Information
This device is flexible to configure according to the application. The following table shows the
required information when ordering a PCS-921.
Ordering Code:
Description and Option S1 S2 S3 − H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9

Application
Standard A

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction
Software Version
Standard 1
Language
Chinese + English E
Chinese + French F
Chinese + Russian R
Chinese + Spanish S
Chinese + Portuguese P
Auxiliary Power
88~300 Vdc 1
Analog AC Inputs
Non available O
CT 1A A
CT 5A B
Digital AC Inputs
Non available 0
2 x 100Base-FX,
1
ST-Connector
2 x 100Base-FX,
ST-Connector, IRIG-B 2
input (ST)
Other 3*
Support to GOOSE
Non available O
2 x 100Base-FX,
A
ST-Connector
Other B*
Binary Inputs
Non available 0
4 fixed + 14 configurable 1
Binary Outputs
Non available O

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction
33 contacts (22 contacts

A
controlled by fault detector)
B
C
Communication Ports
for Automation
2 x EIA-485 + 2 x
1
100Base-TX, RJ45
4 x 100Base-TX, RJ45 2
2 x 100Base-TX, RJ45 + 2
x 100BaseFX, 3
ST-Connector
Other 4*
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 A
DNP 3.0 B
IEC 61850 C*
Note!
For items not specified in the table, please refer to our sales or agent.
Note!
The items marked with “*” are not included in the basic price and have an additional cost.

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Introduction

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2 Technical Data .................................................................................. 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 AC Current Input ................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input ................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply ..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.5 Binary Output ..................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................. 2-2

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-2
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ...................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.4 Print Port ............................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-4

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ........................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................ 2-4
2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-5

2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Fault Detector .................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.2 Breaker Failure Protection ................................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.3 Earth-fault Protection ......................................................................................................... 2-6

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
2.7.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................................ 2-6
2.7.5 Pole Discrepancy Protection .............................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.6 Dead Zone Protection ........................................................................................................ 2-6
2.7.7 Auto-reclosing .................................................................................................................... 2-7

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 AC Current Input
Standard IEC 60255-27:2005
Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In
-for 10s 30In
-for 1s 100In
-for half a cycle 250In
Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In
Accuracy ±0.5%In
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input

Standard IEC 60255-6, IEC60288
Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~170V
Thermal withstand
-continuously 200V
-10s 260V
-1s 300V
Burden at rated < 0.25VA/phase @Un
Accuracy ±0.5%Un
2.1.3 Power Supply

Rated Voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc
Operating Range 80%~120% of rated voltage
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition <30W
Operating condition <35W
2.1.4 Binary Input

Rated Voltage 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V, 250V
Pickup voltage 55%~70% of rated voltage
Dropoff voltage <55% of rated voltage

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
Maximum permissible voltage 120% of rated voltage

Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc
-continously
Response time for logic input <1ms
2.1.5 Binary Output

Output mode Potential free contact
Continuous carry 5A@250Vac, 5A@250Vdc
Typical pickup time 3ms
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.6A@48Vdc, 0.1A@110Vdc, 0.05A@220Vdc
Making capacity 2000VA
Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Test voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min
Short duration current 6A@3s, 15A@0.5s
2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Enclosure dimensions (W×H×D) 482.6mm×177.0mm×291.0mm
Mounting Way Flush mounted
Trepanning dimensions (W×H) 450.0mm×179.0mm, M6 screw
Housing color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 15kg
Housing material Aluminum
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Protection class
Front side IP40, up to IP51 (Flush mounted)
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree 2
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997

Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance <500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997 or IEC 61850
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST, SC
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Connector type LC
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port

Connector type ST
Wave length 820nm
Margin Min +3.0dB

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
®
Printer type EPSON 300K printer
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
measurements
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Radio frequency interference tests Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz

Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22-4:2008
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Conducted RF Electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m
Auxiliary power supply performance IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Certifications
 ISO9001:2000
 ISO14001:2004
 OHSAS18001:1999
 ISO10012:2003
 CMMI L3
 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
 Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data
2.7 Protective Functions

2.7.1 Fault Detector
2.7.1.1 DPFC Overcurrent Element
Setting range 0.050In~30.000In

Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater
2.7.1.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element

2.7.2 Breaker Failure Protection

Pick-up time <20ms
Drop-off time <20ms
Setting range of phase current 0.050In~30.000In
Setting range of residual current 0.050In~30.000In
Setting range of negative-sequence current 0.050In~30.000In
Time delay (first) 0.000~3600.000s
Time delay (second) 0.000~3600.000s
2.7.3 Earth-fault Protection

Accuracy ≤2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater
Time delay 0.00~10.00s
Accuracy ≤1%Setting+40ms
2.7.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection

2.7.5 Pole Discrepancy Protection

2.7.6 Dead Zone Protection


Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data

2.7.7 Auto-reclosing
Phase difference setting range 0~89
(0.02~0.8)Un
Voltage difference setting range
(Un:Secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage)
Frequency difference setting range 0.05~1.00Hz
Time accuracy ≤1%Setting+40ms

Date: 2011-04-20
2 Technical Data

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory ............................................................................. 3-a
3.1 System Parameters ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 General Application ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision ............................................................ 3-1

3.2.3 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP ................................................................................. 3-4
3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP ................................................... 3-6
3.3.4 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection ....................................................................... 3-8

3.4.3 Protection Principle ............................................................................................................ 3-9
3.4.4 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-10

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.4.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.6 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.4.7 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.5 Dead zone protection.................................................................................... 3-12

3.5.1 Application........................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.5.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-12
3.5.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.5.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.5.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-13
3.6 Earth-fault Protection ................................................................................... 3-13

3.6.1 Application........................................................................................................................ 3-13
3.6.3 Protection Principle .......................................................................................................... 3-14
3.6.4 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-15
3.6.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.6.6 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.6.7 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.7 Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................... 3-17

3.7.1 Application........................................................................................................................ 3-17
3.7.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-19
3.7.4 Output Signal ................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.7.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-20
3.8 Pole Discrepancy Protection........................................................................ 3-21

3.8.1 Application........................................................................................................................ 3-21
3.8.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-21
3.8.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.8.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.9 Synchrocheck ............................................................................................... 3-23

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.9.1 Application........................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.9.3 Synchronism Check Logic................................................................................................ 3-28
3.9.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-32
3.10 Automatic Reclosure .................................................................................. 3-34

3.10.1 Application...................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.10.2 Function Description ...................................................................................................... 3-34
3.10.3 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-35
3.10.4 I/O Signal ....................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.10.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.11 Trip Logic ..................................................................................................... 3-49

3.11.1 Application ...................................................................................................................... 3-49
3.11.2 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-49
3.11.3 Logic............................................................................................................................... 3-50
3.11.4 I/O Signal ....................................................................................................................... 3-50
3.11.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-51
3.12 VT Circuit Supervision................................................................................ 3-51

3.12.1 Application...................................................................................................................... 3-51
3.12.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-52
3.12.4 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-52
3.12.5 I/O Signal ....................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.12.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-53

3.13.1 Application...................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.13.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-53
3.13.4 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-53
3.13.5 I/O Signal ....................................................................................................................... 3-54
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-c

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
List of Figures
Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision ......................................................................................3-3
Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program .......................................................................3-7
Figure 3.3-2 Logic of fault detector ..........................................................................................3-8
Figure 3.4-1 Function diagram of phase overcurrent protection ..........................................3-9
Figure 3.4-2 Logic of phase overcurrent protection ............................................................. 3-11
Figure 3.5-1 Dead zone protection .........................................................................................3-13
Figure 3.6-1 Function diagram of earth-fault protection ......................................................3-14
Figure 3.6-2 Earth-fault protection .........................................................................................3-15
Figure 3.6-3 Logic of earth-fault protection...........................................................................3-16
Figure 3.7-1 Breaker failure protection ..................................................................................3-19
Figure 3.8-1 Pole discrepancy ................................................................................................3-22
Figure 3.8-2 Pole discrepancy protection logic diagram .....................................................3-22
Figure 3.9-1Comparative relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage

...........................................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3.9-2 Wiring diagram of voltage connection without voltage selection for
single-breaker ...................................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3.9-3 Single-breaker for double busbars connection ...............................................3-25
Figure 3.9-4 Voltage selection for a single-breaker with double busbars ..........................3-26
Figure 3.9-5 One and a half breakers arrangement connection ..........................................3-27
Figure 3.9-6 Voltage selection for bus breaker in one and a half breakers arrangement ..3-28
Figure 3.9-7 Voltage selection for tie breaker in one and a half breakers arrangement ....3-28
Figure 3.9-8 Synchronism check............................................................................................3-29
Figure 3.9-9 Dead charge check logic ...................................................................................3-30
Figure 3.9-10 Synchrocheck logic ..........................................................................................3-30
Figure 3.10-1 Get ready logic of AR .......................................................................................3-36
Figure 3.10-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR .................................................................3-38
Figure 3.10-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR ..................................................................3-38
Figure 3.10-4 1-pole AR initiation ...........................................................................................3-39
3-d PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.10-5 3-pole AR initiation ...........................................................................................3-39
Figure 3.10-6 One-shot AR ......................................................................................................3-40
Figure 3.10-7 Extra time delay control and blocking logic of long tripping time ...............3-41
Figure 3.10-8 Reclosing output logic .....................................................................................3-41
Figure 3.10-9 Reclosing unsuccessful ..................................................................................3-42
Figure 3.10-10 Single-phase transient fault...........................................................................3-45
Figure 3.10-11 Single-phase permanent fault (79.N_Total_Rcls=2) .....................................3-45
Figure 3.11-1 Simplified tripping logic ...................................................................................3-50
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of VT circuit supervision .......................................................................3-52
Figure 3.14-1 Logic of CT circuit failure ................................................................................3-53
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-e

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3-f PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.1 System Parameters

3.1.1 General Application
The protection device performs various protection functions by respective algorithms with the
information (currents and voltages) acquired from primary system through current transformer and
voltage transformer, so it is important to set up the analog input channels correctly.
Further to the correct analog input channels setup, other protected system information, such as
the parameters of voltage transformer and current transformer are also required.
3.1.2 Function Description
The protection device generally considers transmission line as its protected object, current flows
from busbar to line is considered as the forward direction.
3.1.3 Settings
Table 3.1-1 System parameters
No. Name Range Step Unit Remark

1 U1n 33~65500 1 kV Primary rated value of VT
2 I1n 0~6000 1 A Primary rated value of CT
3 U2n 80~220 1 V Secondary rated value of VT
4 I2n 1 or 5 A Secondary rated value of CT
The voltage used by protection calculation
from busbar VT or line VT
5 VTS.En_Line_VT 0 or 1
1: line VT
0: busbar VT
Protection calculation does not use voltage
1: enable
0: disable
6 VTS.En_Out_VT 0 or 1
In general, when VT is not connected to the
protection device, this logic setting should be
setting as “1”
3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision

The status of circuit breaker (CB) position is applied for protection and control functions in this
device, such as, auto-reclose and VT supervision, etc. The status of CB position can be applied as
input signals for other features configured by user.
The signal reflecting CB position is acquired via opto-coupler with settable delay pick-up and
drop-off, and forms digital signal used by protection functions. CB position can reflect the status of

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
each phase by means of phase-segregated inputs.
In order to prevent that wrong status of CB position is input into the protection device via binary
input, appropriate monitor method is used to check the rationality of the binary input. When the
binary input of CB open position is detected, the status of CB position will be thought as be not
correct and an alarm [Alm_52b] will be issued if there is current detected in the line.
3.2.3 Function Block Diagram
1. For phase-segregated circuit breaker
CB Position Supervision
I3P Alm_52b
52b_PhA
52b_PhB
52b_PhC
2. For non-phase segregated circuit breaker
CB Position Supervision
I3P Alm_52b
52b
3.2.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.2-1 Input signal
No. Input Signal Description Configurable

1 I3P Three-phase current input
2 52b_PhA Normally closed contact of A-phase of circuit breaker
3 52b_PhB Normally closed contact of B-phase of circuit breaker
4 52b_PhC Normally closed contact of C-phase of circuit breaker
5 52b Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker
6 52a Normally open contact of three-phase of circuit breaker
Table 3.2-2 Output signal
No. Output Signal Description Configurable

1 Alm_52b CB position is abnormal

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.2.5 Logic
BI 52b_PhA t1_52b_A t2_52b_A &

>=1
52b_A_CB
BI 52b_PhB t1_52b_B t2_52b_B &

>=1
52b_B_CB
BI 52b_PhC t1_52b_C t2_52b_C &

>=1
52b_C_CB
EN [En_3PhCB] &
BI 52b t1_52b_3Ph t2_52b_3Ph
Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision
Where:
1. t1_52b_A, t1_52b_B, t1_52b_C are pickup delay time of A, B, C-phase input signal used to
indicate CB open position respectively. They are configurable and default value is 5ms.
2. t2_52b_A, t2_52b_B, t2_52b_C are dropoff delay time of A, B, C-phase input signal used to
indicate CB open position respectively. They are configurable and default value is 5ms.
3. t1_52b_3Ph is pickup delay time of three-phase input signal used to indicate CB open
position. It is configurable and default value is 5ms.
4. t2_52b_3Ph is dropoff delay time of three-phase input signal used to indicate CB open
5. t1_52a_3Ph is pickup delay time of three-phase input signal used to indicate CB closed
6. t2_52a_3Ph is dropoff delay time of three-phase input signal used to indicate CB closed
7. I_Line is threshold value used to determine whether line is on-load or no-load. Default value
0.06In.
3.2.6 Settings
Table 3.2-3 Settings

This setting is used to determine whether CB position is
1 En_3PhCB 0 or 1 determined by phase-segregated auxiliary contact or
three-phase auxiliary contact

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
1: phase-segregated contact ([52b_PhA], [52b_PhB],

[52b_PhC])
0: three-phase contact ([52b])
3.3 Fault Detector (FD)

3.3.1 Application
The device has plug-in DSP modules with fault detector DSP and protection DSP for fault detector
and protection calculation respectively. Protection DSP with protection fault detector element is
responsible for calculation of protection elements, and fault detector DSP is responsible to
determine fault appearance on the protected power system. Fault detector in fault detector DSP
picks up to provide positive supply to output relays. The output relays can only operate when both
the fault detector in fault detector DSP and a protection element operate simultaneously.
Otherwise, the output relays would not operate. An alarm message will be issued with blocking
outputs if a protection element operates while the fault detector does not operate.
3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP
Main part of FD is DPFC current detector element that detects the change of phase-to-phase
power frequency current, and residual current fault detector element that calculates the vector
sum of 3 phase currents as supplementary. They are continuously calculating the analog input
signals.
The FD pickup condition in this relay includes:
1. Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value
2. Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value
If any of the above conditions is complied, the FD will operate to activate the output circuit
providing with DC power supply to the output relays.
3.3.2.1 Fault Detector Based on DPFC Current (pickup condition 1)
DPFC phase-to-phase current is obtained by subtracting the phase-to-phase current from that of a
cycle before.
I(k) is the sampling value at the time point.
I(k-24) is the sampling value at a cycle before, 24 is the sampling points in one cycle.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
200
100
-100
-200
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Original Current
100
50
-50
-100
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
DPFC current
From above figures, it is concluded that DPFC can reflect the sudden change of fault current at the
initial stage of a fault and has a perfect performance of fault detection.
It is used to determine whether this pickup condition is met according to Equation 3.3-1.
For multi-phase short-circuit fault, the DPFC phase-to-phase current has high sensitivity to ensure
the pickup of protection device. For usual single phase to earth fault, it also has sufficient
sensitivity to pick up except the earth fault with very large fault resistance. Under this condition the
DPFC current is relative small, however, residual current is also used to judge pickup condition
(pickup condition 2).
This element adopts adaptive floating threshold varied with the change of load current
continuously. The change of load current is small and steadily under normal or power swing
condition, the adaptive floating threshold with the ΔISet is higher than the change of current under
these conditions and hence maintains the element stability.
The criterion is:
ΔIΦΦMAX>1.25ΔITh+ΔISet Equation 3.3-1
Where:
ΔIΦΦMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current (ΦΦ=AB, BC, CA)
ΔISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set])
ΔITh: The floating threshold value
The coefficient, 1.25, is an empirical value which ensures the threshold always higher than the
unbalance output value of the system.
If operating condition is met, DPFC current element will pickup and trigger FD to provide DC power
supply for output relays, the FD operation signal will maintain 7 seconds after DPFC overcurrent
element drops off.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.3.2.2 Fault Detector Based on Residual Overcurrent (pickup condition 2)
This pickup condition will be met when 3I0 is greater than the setting [FD.ROC.3I0_Set].
Where:
3I0: residual current calculates from the vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic
When CT circuit failure is detected, FD based on residual current will be disabled and an alarm
[CTS.Alm] will be issued.
If operating condition is met, the residual current FD element will pickup and trigger FD to provide
DC power supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept for 7 seconds after the residual
current FD element drops off.
3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP
The protection device is running either of the two programs: one is “Regular program” for normal
state, and the other is “Fault calculation program” after protection fault detector picks up.
Under the normal state, the protection device will perform the following tasks:
1. Calculate analog quantity
2. Read binary input
3. Hardware self-check
4. Circuit breaker position supervision
5. Analog quantity input supervision
Once the protection fault detector element in protection calculation DSP picks up, the protection
device will switch to fault calculation program, for example the calculation of phase overcurrent
protection, and to determine logic. If the fault is within the protected zone, the protection device will
send tripping command.
The protection program flow chart is shown as Figure 3.3-1.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Main program
Sampling program
No Yes
Pickup?
Regular program Fault calculation program
Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program
The protection FD pickup conditions are the same as the FD in fault detector DSP as shown below.
The operation criteria for the conditions are also the same as that in fault detector DSP. Please
refer to section 3.3.2 for details.
1. Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value
2. Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value
When any pickup condition mentioned above is met, the protection device will go to fault
calculation state.
FD
I3P Pkp
CTS.Alm DPFC.Pkp
ROC.Pkp
3.3.5 I/O Signal


Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
1 FD.Pkp The device picks up

2 FD.DPFC.Pkp DPFC current fault detector element operates.
3 FD.ROC.Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates.
3.3.6 Logic
OTH Ia Calculate DPFC phase-to-phase OTH △Iab>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

current >=1
OTH Ib △Iab=△(Ia-Ib) OTH △Ibc>[FD.DPFC.I_Set] FD.DPFC.Pkp
△Ibc=△(Ib-Ic)
OTH Ic △Ica=△(Ic-Ia) OTH △Ica>[FD.DPFC.I_Set] >=1
0s 7s FD.Pkp
Calculate residual current OTH 3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set] FD.ROC.Pkp

3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic
Figure 3.3-2 Logic of fault detector
3.3.7 Settings
Table 3.3-3 FD Settings

Current setting of DPFC current fault
1 FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
detector element
Current setting of residual current fault
2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
detector element
3.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection

When a fault occurs in power system, usually the fault current would be very large and phase
overcurrent protection operates monitoring fault current is then adopted to avoid further damage to
protected equipment. For application on transformer circuits, second harmonic can also be
selected to block phase overcurrent protection to avoid the effect of inrush current on the
protection. Phase overcurrent protection is non-direction.
An external fault will result in transformer overload and transformer may deteriorate if the fault is
not cleared immediately. Phase overcurrent protection could operate to trip circuit breakers of
transformer to avoid physical damage. For small transformers, phase overcurrent protection can
protect transformer from internal faults as main protection, while for large-scale transformers, the
protection is applied as the backup of transformer differential protection.
Phase overcurrent protection has following functions:
1. Two-stage phase overcurrent protection with independent logic, current and time delay
settings.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
2. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of phase overcurrent protection.
3.4.3 Protection Principle
3.4.3.1 Overview
Phase overcurrent protection consists of following elements:
1. Phase overcurrent element: each stage is independent phase overcurrent element.
2. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all phase overcurrent
elements and each phase overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal from
harmonic element as a blocking input.
Stage 1 St
Phase
Overcurrent
Element
Op
I3P Harmonic Harmonic blocking signal
Blocking
Element
Stage 2 St
Phase
Overcurrent
Element
Op
Figure 3.4-1 Function diagram of phase overcurrent protection
3.4.3.2 Phase Overcurrent Element
The operation criterion for each stage of phase overcurrent protection is:
Ip> [50/51Px.I_Set] Equation 3.4-1
Where:
Ip is measured phase current.
[50/51Px.I_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1, or 2) of phase overcurrent protection.
3.4.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element
When phase overcurrent protection is set to protect line-transformer unit during transformer
energization, in order to prevent inrush current leading to maloperation of phase overcurrent
protection, harmonic blocking function can be selected for each stage of phase overcurrent
element by configuring logic setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2] (x=1, or 2).
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of any phase
current is greater than the setting [50/51P.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x of phase overcurrent protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2] enabled.
Operation criterion:

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Equation 3.4-2
Where:
is second harmonic of phase current
is fundamental component of phase current.
[50/51P.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of any phase current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.1In), then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.
50/51Px
I3P 50/51Px.St
50/51Px.En1 50/51Px.Op
50/51Px.En2
50/51Px.Blk
3.4.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.4-1 Input signals

1 I3P Three-phase current input No
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it can be
2 50/51Px.En1 Yes
binary inputs or logic links.(x=1, or 2)
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it can be
3 50/51Px.En2 Yes
binary inputs or logic link. (x=1, or 2)
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, such as
function blocking binary input.
4 50/51Px.Blk Yes
When the input is 1, phase overcurrent protection is reset and
time delay is cleared. (x=1, or 2)
Table 3.4-2 Output signals
1 50/51Px.Op Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates. (x=1, or 2) Yes
2 50/51Px.St Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts. (x=1, or 2) Yes

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.4.6 Logic
Logic diagram of phase overcurrent is shown in the following figure, including phase overcurrent
element and harmonic blocking element.
EN [50/51Px.En]
&
SIG [50/51Px.En1]
SIG [50/51Px.En2]
SIG [50/51Px.Blk]
& [50/51Px.St]
50/51Px.t_Op 0ms
SET Ia, Ib or Ic>[50/51Px.I_Set] [50/51Px.Op]
SIG I3P 2nd Hm Detect &
SET [50/51Px.En_Hm2]
Figure 3.4-2 Logic of phase overcurrent protection
Where:
x=1, 2
3.4.7 Settings
Table 3.4-3 Phase overcurrent protection settings

Restrained coefficient of second
1. 50/51P.k_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001
harmonic component
Current setting for stage 1 of phase
2. 50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
overcurrent protection
Time delay for stage 1 of phase
3. 50/51P1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Enabling or disabling stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
4. 50/51P1.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling or disabling second
harmonic blocking for stage 1 of
5. 50/51P1.En_Hm2 0 or 1 phase overcurrent protection
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting for stage 2 of phase
6. 50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
Time delay for stage 2 of phase
7. 50/51P2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
8. 50/51P2.En 0 or 1
phase overcurrent protection

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
0: disable
1: enable
9. 50/51P2.En_Hm2 0 or 1 phase overcurrent protection
0: disable
1: enable
3.5 Dead zone protection

3.5.1 Application
Generally, fault current is very large when multi-phase fault occurs between TA and circuit breaker
(i.e. dead zone) and it will have a greater impact on the system. Breaker failure protection can
operate after a longer time delay, in order to clear the dead zone fault quickly and improve the
system stability, dead zone protection with shorter time delay (compared with breaker failure
protection) is adopted.
For some wiring arrangement (for example, circuit breaker is located between TA and the line), if
fault occurs between TA and circuit breaker, line protection can operate to trip circuit breaker
quickly, but fault have not been cleared since local circuit breaker is tripped. Here dead zone
protection is needed in order to trip relevant circuit breaker.
3.5.3 Logic
The criterion for dead zone protection is: when dead zone protection is enabled, binary input of
initiating dead zone protection is energized (by default, three-phase tripping signal is used to
initiate dead zone protection), if overcurrent element for dead zone protection operates, then
corresponding circuit breaker is tripped and three phases normally closed contact of the circuit
breaker are energized, dead zone protection will operate to trip adjacent circuit breaker after a
time delay.
EN [50DZ.En]
&
SIG [50DZ.En1]
SIG [50DZ.En2]
& 50DZ.St
SIG [50DZ.Blk] 50DZ.t_Op 0ms 50DZ.Op
BI 52b_PhA &
BI 52b_PhB &
BI 52b_PhC
SET Ia, Ib or Ic > [50DZ.I_Set]

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.5-1 Dead zone protection
3.5.4 I/O Signal
Input Signal Description Config

I3P Three-phase current input
Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it can be binary inputs
50DZ.En1 Yes
or logic links.
Dead zone protection enabling input 2, it can be binary inputs
50DZ.En2 Yes
or logic link.
Dead zone protection blocking input, such as function
blocking binary input.
50DZ.Blk Yes
When the input is 1, dead zone protection is reset and time
delay is cleared. (x=1, or 2)
Output Signal Description Config

50DZ.St dead zone protection starts. Y
50DZ.Op dead zone protection operates. Y
3.5.5 Settings
Current setting for dead zone

protection. This setting shall ensure
1 50DZ.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
the protection being sensitive
enough if dead zone fault occurs.
Logic setting for enabling dead

zone protection.
2 50DZ.En 0 or 1 -
1: enable
0: disable
Time delay of dead zone

3 50DZ.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
protection.
3.6 Earth-fault Protection

3.6.1 Application
During normal operation of power system, there is trace residual current whereas a fault current
flows to earth will result in greater residual current. Therefore, residual current is adopted for the
calculation of earth-fault protection. Second harmonic also can be selected to block earth-fault

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
protection to avoid the effect of sympathetic current on the protection.
Earth-fault protection has following functions:
1. Two-stage earth-fault protection with independent logic, current and time delay settings.
2. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of earth-fault protection.
3. Calculated residual current is used for the calculation of earth-fault protection.
3.6.3 Protection Principle
3.6.3.1 Overview
Earth-fault protection consists of following two elements:
1. Earth-fault element: each stage equipped with one independent earth-fault element.
2. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all earth-fault
elements and each earth-fault element can individually enable the output signal of harmonic
blocking element as a blocking input.
Stage1 St
Earth-fault
Element Op
3I0 from I3P Harmonic Harmonic blocking signal

Blocking
Element Stage2 St
Earth-fault
Element Op
Figure 3.6-1 Function diagram of earth-fault protection
3.6.3.2 Earth-fault Element
The operation criterion for each stage of earth-fault protection is:
3I0>[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] Equation 3.6-1
Where:
3I0 is the calculated residual current.
[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of earth-fault protection.
3.6.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element
In order to prevent effects of inrush current on earth-fault protection, harmonic blocking function
can be selected for each stage of earth-fault element by configuring logic setting
[50/51Gx.En_Hm2] (x=1, 2).
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of residual

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
current is greater than the setting [50/51G.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x of earth-fault protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Gx.En_Hm2] is enabled
Operation criterion:
Equation 3.6-2
Where:
is second harmonic of residual current
is fundamental component of residual current.
[50/51G.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of residual current is lower than the minimum operating current (0.1In)
then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not operate.
50/51Gx
I3P 50/51Gx.St
50/51Gx.En1 50/51Gx.Op
50/51Gx.En2
50/51Gx.Blk
Figure 3.6-2 Earth-fault protection
3.6.5 I/O Signal
Input Signal Description Config

I3P Three-phase current input
Stage x of earth-fault protection enabling input 1, it can be
50/51Gx.En1 Yes
binary inputs or logic links.
Stage x of earth-fault protection enabling input 2, it can be
50/51Gx.En2 Yes
binary inputs or logic link.
Stage x of earth-fault protection blocking input, such as
50/51Gx.Blk Yes
When the input is 1, earth-fault protection is reset and time
delay is cleared.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory

50/51Gx.St Stage x of residual overcurrent protection starts. (x=1,or 2) Yes
50/51Gx.Op Stage x of residual overcurrent protection operates. (x=1,or 2) Yes
3.6.6 Logic
Logic diagram of earth-fault protection is shown in the following figure.
EN [50/51Gx.En]
SIG [50/51Gx.En1]
&
SIG [50/51Gx.En2]
SIG [50/51Gx.Blk]
& [50/51Gx.St]
50/51Gx.t_Op 0ms
SET 3I0>[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] [50/51Gx.Op]
SIG I3P 2nd Hm Detect &
SET [50/51Gx.En_Hm2]
Figure 3.6-3 Logic of earth-fault protection
Where:
x=1, 2
3.6.7 Settings

Restrained coefficient of second
1 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001
harmonic component
Current setting for stage 1 of
2 50/51G1.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
earth-fault protection
Time delay for stage 1 of
3 50/51G1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
4 50/51G1.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
5 50/51G1.En_Hm2 0 or 1 earth-fault protection
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting for stage 2 of
6 50/51G2.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
7 50/51G2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s Time delay for stage 2 of

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
8 50/51G2.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
9 50/51G2.En_Hm2 0 or 1 earth-fault protection
0: disable
1: enable
3.7 Breaker Failure Protection

3.7.1 Application
Duplicated protection configurations are usually adopted for EHV power system, but the primary
device, circuit breaker, is not duplicated. Breaker failure protection is adopted to cater circuit
breaker tripping failure.
Breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case
of a tripping failure of the circuit breaker, and clears the fault as requested by the protection. To
utilize the protection information of faulty equipment and the electrical information of failure circuit
breaker to constitute the criterion of breaker failure protection, it can ensure that the adjacent
circuit breakers of failure circuit breaker are tripped with a shorter time delay, so that the affected
area is minimized, and ensure stable operation of the entire power grid to prevent generators,
transformers and other components from seriously damaged.
The instantaneous re-tripping function, after receiving tripping signal from other protection device
and the corresponding phase overcurrent element operating, is available and provides
phase-segregated binary output contact, which can ensure the circuit breaker be still tripped in
case the secondary circuit between the protection device and the circuit breaker is abnormal, to
avoid undesired tripping of breaker failure protection and the expansion of the affected area.
Instantaneous re-tripping function does not block AR.
When both the phase-segregated tripping contact from line protection and the corresponding
phase overcurrent element operate, or both the three-phase tripping contact and any phase
overcurrent element operate, breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to
trip local circuit breaker after time delay of [50BF.t1_Op] and trip all adjacent circuit breakers after
time delay of [50BF.t2_Op].
When the protection element except undervoltage element within this device operates and issues
tripping signal, the breaker failure protection will also be initiated.
Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, residual current criterion and
negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent element for

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
breaker failure protection initiated by generator and transformer protection at [50BF.ExTrp3P_GT].

They can be enabled or disabled by logic settings [50BF.En_3I0_3P] and [50BF.En_I2_3P]
respectively.
For some special fault (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),
maybe faulty current is very small and current criterion of breaker failure protection is not met, in
order to make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, the binary
input [50BF.ExTrp_WOI] is equipped for the protection to initiate breaker failure protection, once
the binary input is energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in
addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timer。 The relays takes current
as priority with CB auxiliary contact (52b) as an option criteria for breaker failure check.
An alarm signal [Alm_BI_ExTrp] will be issued if any of the binary inputs of single-phase or
three-phase tripping contact from external protection is energized and the duration is longer than
10s.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.7.3 Logic
EN [50BF.En] &
EN [50BF.En_ReTrip]
EN [50BF.En_3I0_1P] >=1
SET 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]
& &
BI [50BF.ExTrpA] >=1 [50.BF.t_Retrp] 0ms [50BF.Op_ReTrpA]
SET IA>[50BF.I_Set]
& &
BI [50BF.ExTrpB] >=1 [50.BF.t_Retrp] 0ms [50BF.Op_ReTrpB]
SET IB>[50BF.I_Set]
& &
BI [50BF.ExTrpC] >=1 [50.BF.t_Retrp] 0ms [50BF.Op_ReTrpC]
>=1
SET IC>[50BF.I_Set]
>=1
configurable binary inputs - they are not &
required to configure if not used. & [50BF.Op_ReTrp3P]
BI [50BF.ExTrp3P_L]
>=1
BI [50BF.ExTrp3P_GT] >=1
BI [50BF.ExTrp_WOI]
& >=1
EN [En_ROC_3P_BFP] & >=1
SET 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]
&
EN [50BF.En_I2_3P] &
[50BF.t1_Op] 0ms [50BF.Op_t1]

SET I2>[50BF.I2_Set]
&
& [50BF.t2_Op] 0ms [50BF.Op_t2]
EN [50BF.En_CB_Ctrl]
BI [52b_PhA]
&
BI [52b_PhB]
BI [52b_PhC]
EN [50BF.En]
Figure 3.7-1 Breaker failure protection
[50BF.ExTrpA]: The binary input of phase-A tripping contact from external protection
[50BF.ExTrpB]: The binary input of phase-B tripping contact from external protection
[50BF.ExTrpC]: The binary input of phase-C tripping contact from external protection
[50BF.ExTrp3P_L]: The binary input of three-phase tripping contact from line protection
[50BF.ExTrp3P_GT]: The binary input of three-phase tripping contact from generator or

transformer protection
[50BF.Op_ReTrpA]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker
[50BF.Op_ReTrpB]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
[50BF.Op_ReTrpC]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker
[50BF.Op_ReTrp3P]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker
[50BF.Op_t1]: Stage 1 of breaker failure protection operates
[50BF.Op_t2]: Stage 2 of breaker failure protection operates
[50BF.ExTrp_WOI]: The binary input of three-phase tripping contact from external protection.
Once the binary input is energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in
addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.
3.7.4 Output Signal
No. Output Signal Description Config

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit
1 50BF.Op_ReTrpA Yes
breaker
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit
2 50BF.Op_ReTrpB Yes
breaker
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit
3 50BF.Op_ReTrpC Yes
breaker
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase
4 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P Yes
circuit breaker
5 50BF.Op_t1 Stage 1 breaker failure protection operates Yes
6 50BF.Op_t2 Stage 2 breaker failure protection operates Yes
3.7.5 Settings

current setting of phase current
1 50BF.I_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A
criterion of BFP
current setting of residual current
2 50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A
criterion of BFP
current setting of
3 50BF.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A negative-sequence current
criterion of BFP
4 50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~3600.000 0.001 s time delay of re-tripping
5 50BF.t1_Op 0.000~3600.000 0.001 s time delay of stage 1 BFP
6 50BF.t2_Op 0.000~3600.000 0.001 s time delay of stage 2 BFP

breaker failure protection
7 50BF.En 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
re-trip function
8 50BF.En_ReTrip 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
9 50BF.En_3I0_1P 0 or 1 residual current criterion for BFP

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
initiated by single-phase tripping

contact
1: enable
0: disable
residual current criterion for BFP
initiated by three-phase tripping
10 50BF.En_3I0_3P 0 or 1 contact
1: enable
0: disable
negative-sequence current criterion
for BFP initiated by three-phase
11 50BF.En_I2_3P 0 or 1 tripping contact
1: enable
0: disable
breaker failure protection can be
initiated by normally closed contact
12 50BF.En_CB_Ctrl 0 or 1 of circuit breaker
1: enable
0: disable
3.8 Pole Discrepancy Protection

3.8.1 Application
The pole discrepancy of circuit breaker may occur during operation of a breaker with segregated
operating gears for the three phases. The reason could be an interruption in the trip/close coil
circuits, or a mechanical failure resulting in a stuck breaker phase. A pole discrepancy can only be
tolerated for a limited period. When there is loading, zero-sequence or negative-sequence
unbalance current will be generated in the power system, which will result in overheat of the
generator or the motor. With the load current increasing, overcurrent elements based on residual
current or negative-sequence current may operate. Pole discrepancy protection is required to
operate before the operation of these overcurrent elements.
By the auxiliary contact of CB position, pole discrepancy protection determines whether the
three-phase breaker is pole discrepancy. In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy
protection, the asymmetrical current component can be selected as addition criteria when needed.
3.8.3 Logic
Pole discrepancy protection can be initiated by two methods.
Initiation method 1 is using external pole discrepancy contact of circuit breaker to initiate pole
discrepancy protection, i.e. the binary input [62PD.In_PD] and its connection is shown as below.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
DC+
52b_PhA 52a_PhA
52b_PhB 52a_PhB
Binary input
52b_PhC 52a_PhC 62PD.In_PD
Figure 3.8-1 Pole discrepancy
Where:
52b_PhA: normally closed CB auxiliary contact of phase A
52b_PhB: normally closed CB auxiliary contact of phase B
52b_PhC: normally closed CB auxiliary contact of phase C
52a_PhA: normally open CB auxiliary contact of phase A
52a_PhB: normally open CB auxiliary contact of phase B
52a_PhC: normally open CB auxiliary contact of phase C
Initiation method 2 is phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts connected to the

protection device. When the state of three phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are
inconsistent, pole discrepancy protection will be started and initiat output after [62PD.t_Op] delay.
Pole discrepancy protection can be blocked by external binary input [62PD.Blk]. In general, this
binary input is usually from the output of 1-pole AR initiation, so as to prevent pole discrepancy
protection operation during 1-pole AR initiation.
EN [62PD.En]
SIG [62PD.En1]
&
SIG [62PD.En2] &
SIG [62PD.Blk] &
[62PD.t_Op] 0ms 62PD.Op
BI [62PD.In_PD]
EN [62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl] >=1
SET 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set] >=1
SET I2>[62PD.I2_Set]
Figure 3.8-2 Pole discrepancy protection logic diagram
3I0: Calculated residual current by vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.8.4 I/O Signal
No. Signal Description Configurable

Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it can be binary
2 62PD.En1 Yes
inputs or logic links.
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it can be binary
3 62PD.En2 Yes
inputs or logic link.
Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, such as function
blocking binary input.
4 62PD.Blk Yes
When the input is 1, Pole discrepancy is reset and time delay is
cleared.
5 62PD.In_PD Pole discrepancy binary input

1 62PD.Op Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip Yes
3.8.5 Settings

current setting of residual
1 62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A current criterion for pole
discrepancy protection
current setting of
negative-sequence current
2 62PD.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A
criterion for pole discrepancy
protection
time delay of pole
3 62PD.t_Op 0.000~3600.000 0.001 s
pole discrepancy protection
4 62PD.En 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
residual current criterion
and negative-sequence
current criterion for pole
5 62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
3.9 Synchrocheck
3.9.1 Application
The purpose of synchrocheck is to ensure two systems are synchronism before they are going to
be connected.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between the
two systems, larger impact will be led to the system during closing. Thus auto-reclosing and
manual closing are applied with the synchrocheck to avoid this situation and maintain the system
stability. The synchrocheck includes synchronism check and dead charge check.
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them with the corresponding settings. The output is only given if all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The dead charge check function measures the amplitude of line voltage and bus voltage at both
sides of the circuit breaker; then compare them with the live check setting [25.U_Lv] and the dead
check setting [25.U_Dd]; The output is only given when the measured quantities comply with the
criteria.
Synchrocheck in this device can be used for auto-reclosing and manual closing for both
single-breaker and dual-breaker. Details are described in the following sections.
Voltage selection function
When used for the synchrocheck of single-breaker, comparative relationship between reference
voltage (UL) and incoming voltage (UB) for synchronism is as follows.
UL UB
Figure 3.9-1Comparative relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage
1） Single busbar arrangement
Voltage selection function is not required for this arrangement, the connection of the voltage
signals and respective VT MCB auxiliary contacts to the relay is shown in the following figure.
Bus
VTS.En_Line_VT=0
Ua

UL1 Ub
CB
Uc
MCB_VT_UL1
Line
UB1
MCB_VT_UB1

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
(a) Three-phase Bus voltage used for protection
Bus
VTS.En_Line_VT=1
CB
UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
Ua

UL1 Ub
Uc
Line
MCB_VT_UL1
(b) Three-phase Line voltage used for protection
Figure 3.9-2 Wiring diagram of voltage connection without voltage selection for single-breaker
In the figure, system setting [VTS.En_Line_VT] is for selection protection voltage signals Ua, Ub,
Uc from line VT or bus VT according to the condition.
2） Double busbars arrangement
BUS2
BUS1
B1D B2D
UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
UB2
MCB_VT_UB2
UB1D_Clsd
UB1D_Open 
UB2D_Clsd
UB2D_Open 
Ua

UL1 Ub
Uc
MCB_VT
Figure 3.9-3 Single-breaker for double busbars connection
For double busbar arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals from Bus 1 and Bus 2 for
syncheonizing are required. The line VT signal is taken as reference to check synchronizing with
the voltage after voltage selection function. Selection approach is as follows.
For the disconnector positions, the normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts of the
disconnector for bus 1 and bus 2 are required to determine the disconnector open and closed
positions. The voltage selection logic is as follows.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
BI UB1D_Clsd &
UB1_SEL
BI UB1D_Open
Voltage
selection UB2_SEL
logic
BI UB2D_Clsd &
BI UB2D_Open
&
InvalidSEL
UB1 UB
UB2
Figure 3.9-4 Voltage selection for a single-breaker with double busbars
After acquiring the disconnector open and closed positions of double busbars, use the following
logic to acquire the branch voltage of double busbars.
Table 3.9-1 Logic scheme
Bus 2 Disconnector is closed Bus 2 Disconnector is open
Bus 1 Disconnector is closed Keep the original value Obtain from Bus 1 VT
(UB1_Sel=1)
Bus 1 Disconnector is open Obtain from Bus 2 VT (UB2_Sel=1) Keep the original value
If voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel＝1), keep the original selection and without switchover.
3） One and a half breakers arrangement
For one and a half breakers arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals among Line1
VT, Line2 VT and Bus 2 VT as reference voltage to check synchronizing with Bus 1 voltage signal
for closing side breaker at Bus 1.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
BUS1
UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
Line 1
UB1D_Clsd
UB1D_Open
 B1D
Ua
UL1
 Ub
Uc
L1D
MCB_VT_UL1
UL1D_Clsd
UL1D_Open

Line 2
UL2
MCB_VT_UL2
L2D
UL2D_Clsd
UL2D_Open

UB2D_Clsd
UB2D_Open
 B2D
UB2
MCB_VT_UB2
BUS2
Figure 3.9-5 One and a half breakers arrangement connection
For bus breaker (take bus breaker of bus 1 as an example), the device acquires the disconnector
open and closed positions of two outgoing feeders and bus 2. The voltage selection logic is as
follows.
BI UL1D_Clsd &
UL1_SEL
BI UL1D_Open
&
BI UL2D_Clsd & UL2_SEL
BI UL2D_Open
BI UB2D_Clsd & &

UB2_SEL
BI UB2D_Open
&
InvalidSEL
UL1 UL
UL2
UB2

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.9-6 Voltage selection for bus breaker in one and a half breakers arrangement
For the tie breaker, the device acquires the disconnector open and closed positions of two
outgoing feeders and two busbars. Either Line 1 VT or Bus 1 VT signal is selected as reference
voltage to check synchronizing with the selected voltage between Line 2 VT and Bus 2 VT. The
voltage selection logic is as follows.
BI UL1D_Clsd &
UL1_SEL
BI UL1D_Open
&
BI UB1D_Clsd & UB1_SEL
BI UB1D_Open
&
UL1 UL
UB1
BI UL2D_Clsd &
UL2_SEL
BI UL2D_Open
&
BI UB2D_Clsd & UB2_SEL
BI UB2D_Open
>=1
& InvalidSEL
UL2 UB
UB2
Figure 3.9-7 Voltage selection for tie breaker in one and a half breakers arrangement
When the selected voltage fails (including VT circuit failure and MCB failure), the device will issue
the corresponding voltage failure signal. If the voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel＝1), keep
the original selection and without switchover.
In order to simplify description, one of the two voltages used in the synchrocheck (synchronism check
and dead charge check) which obtained after voltage selection function is regarded as line voltage,
and another is bus voltage.
3.9.3 Synchronism Check Logic
The logic diagram gives the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and
dead charge check.
3.9.3.1 Synchrocheck for auto-reclosing
The frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages from both sides of
the circuit breaker are calculated in the protective device, they are used as input conditions of the
synchronism check.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltages of both ends meets the
requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference, and there is no
synchronism check blocking signal, it is regarded that the synchronism check conditions are met.
The dead charge check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check,
dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be
enabled and disabled by the corresponding logic settings. The protection can calculate the
measured bus voltage and line voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with
the setting [25.U_Lv] and [25.U_Dd], when the voltage is higher than [25.U_Lv], the bus/line is
regarded as live; when the voltage is lower than [25.U_Dd], the bus/line is regarded as dead.
SIG 25.Blk_Chk >=1

&
SIG 25.Blk_SynChk
EN [25.En_SynChk]
SIG 25.Start_Chk
SIG UB>[25.U_Lv]
& &
OTH UL>[25.U_Lv] 50ms 0ms & [25.t_SynChk] 0ms 25.Ok_SynChk
OTH 25.Ok_UDiff
OTH 25.Ok_phiDiff
OTH 25.Ok_fDiff
Figure 3.9-8 Synchronism check

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
SIG 25.Blk_Chk >=1

&
SIG 25.Blk_DdChk &
[25.t_DdChk] 0ms 25.Ok_DdChk
SIG 25.Start_Chk
EN [25.En_DdL_DdB] &
25.Ok_DdL_DdB
EN [25.En_DdL_LvB] &
25.Ok_DdL_LvB
EN [25.En_LvL_DdB] &
25.Ok_LvL_DdB
OTH UL>[25.U_Lv] >=1
OTH UL<[25.U_Dd]
OTH UB>[25.U_Lv]
OTH UB<[25.U_Dd]
SIG 25.Alm_VTS_UB >=1
SIG 25.Alm_VTS_UL
Figure 3.9-9 Dead charge check logic
SIG 25.Ok_SynChk
>=1
EN 25.En_NoChk 25.Ok_Chk
SIG 25.Ok_DdChk
Figure 3.9-10 Synchrocheck logic
This device comprises two synchrocheck modules, correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit
breaker 2 respectively.
Where:
1) 25.Ok_UDiff
Voltage difference condition for AR is satisfied, voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller
than [25.U_Diff].
2) 25.Ok_phiDiff

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Phase difference condition for AR is satisfied, phase difference between UB and UL is smaller
than [25.phi_Diff].
3) 25.Ok_fDiff
Frequency difference condition for AR is satisfied, frequency difference between UB and UL is

smaller than [25.f_Diff].
4) 25.Blk_Chk
The binary input of blocking of the synchrocheck function for AR.
5) 25.Blk_SynChk
Blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the output of synchronism check is “0”.
6) 25.Blk_DdChk
Blocking signal of dead check for AR.
7) 25.Start_Chk
Synchronism check starting signal, usually it was the auto-reclosure starting signal from
auto-reclosure module.
8) 25.Chk_LvL, 25.Chk_LvB
The line voltage, the bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv].
9) 25.Chk_DdL, 25.Chk_DdB
The line voltage, the bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd].
10) 25.VTS_Alm_UB
UB of Synchronous voltage circuit is abnormal l.
11) 25.VTS_Alm_UL
UL of Synchronous voltage circuit is abnormal.
12) 25.Ok_DdL_DdB
Dead line and dead bus condition is satisfied.
13) 25.Ok_DdL_LvB
Dead line and live bus condition is satisfied.
14) 25.Ok_LvL_DdB
Live line and dead bus condition is satisfied.
3.9.4 I/O Signal
No. Output Signal Description

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
1 UL1_Sel Voltage of line 1 for selection

2 UL2_Sel Voltage of line 2 for selection
3 UB1_Sel Voltage of bus 1 for selection
4 UB2_Sel Voltage of bus 2 for selection
5 Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid
The binary signal for indicating frequency difference condition for AR
6 25.Ok_fDiff
synchronisim check is met
The binary signal for indicating voltage difference condition for AR synchronisim
7 25.Ok_UDiff
check is met
The binary signal for indicating phase difference condition for AR synchronisim
8 25.Ok_phiDiff
check is met
9 25.Ok_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus condition is met
10 25.Ok_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus condition is met
11 25.Ok_LvL_DdB Live line and dead bus condition is met
12 25.Chk_LvL The line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
13 25.Chk_DdL The line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
14 25.Chk_LvB The bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
15 25.Chk_DdB The bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
16 25.Ok_DdChk The binary signal for indicating dead charge check condition for AR is met
17 25.Ok_ChkChk The binary signal for indicating synchronism check condition for AR is met
18 25.Ok_Chk The binary signal for indicating synchrocheck condition for AR is met
19 25.VTS_Alm_UB Synchronous voltage circuit of UB is abnormal
20 25.VTS_Alm_UL Synchronous voltage circuit of UL is abnormal
21 f_Prot Frequency of UL voltage
22 f_Syn Frequency of UB voltage
23 u_Diff Voltage difference for synchronism check
24 f_Diff Frequency difference for synchronism check
25 phi_Diff Phase difference for synchronism check
3.9.5 Settings

Voltage selecting mode of line.
0: A-phase voltage
1: B-phase voltage
1 25.Opt_Source_UL 0~5 1 3: C-phase voltage
4: AB-phase voltage
5: BC-phase voltage
6: CA-phase voltage
Voltage selecting mode of bus.
0: A-phase voltage
2 25.Opt_Source_UB 0~5 1
1: B-phase voltage
3: C-phase voltage

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
4: AB-phase voltage
5: BC-phase voltage
6: CA-phase voltage
3 25.U_Dd 0.05Un~0.8Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of dead check
4 25.U_Lv 0.5Un~Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of live check
Compensation coefficient for

5 25.K_Usyn 0.20-5.00
synchronous voltage
Phase difference limit of
6 25.phi_Diff 0~ 89 1 Deg
synchronism check for AR
The fixed phase difference
7 25.phi_Comp 0~359 1 Deg between two synchronous
voltages
Frequency difference limit of
8 25.f_Diff 0.02~1.00 0.01 Hz
Voltage difference limit of
9 25.U_Diff 0.02Un~0.8Un V
time delay to confirm dead check
10 25.t_DeadChk 0.010~25.000 s
condition
time delay to confirm synchronism
11 25.t_SynChk 0.010~25.000 s
check condition
frequency difference check
12 25.En_fDiffChk 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
synchronism check
13 25.En_SynChk 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
Dead line and dead bus (DLDB)
check
14 25.En_DdL_DdB 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
Dead line and live bus (DLLB)
check
15 25.En_DdL_LvB 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
Live line and dead bus (LLDB)
check
16 25.En_LvL_DdB 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
AR without dead charge check and
synchronism check
17 25.En_NoChk 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.10 Automatic Reclosure

3.10.1 Application
To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, protective relays are
installed on the transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances.
Faults caused by lightning, wind, or tree branches could be transient in nature and may disappear
once the circuit is de-energized. According to statistics, for overhead transmission line, 80%~90%
of the faults on overhead lines are the transient faults. Automatic reclosing systems are installed to
restore the faulted section of the transmission system once the fault is extinguished (providing it is
a transient fault). For certain transmission systems, reclosing is used to improve system stability
by restoring critical transmission paths as soon as possible.
Besides overhead lines, other equipment failure, such as cables, busbar, transformer fault and so
on, are generally permanent fault, and automatic reclosing is not initiated after faulty feeder is
tripped. For some mixed circuits, such as overhead line with a transformer unit, hybrid
transmission lines, etc., it is required to ensure that autoreclose be only initiated for faults
overhead line section, or make a choice according to the situation.
This automatic reclosing logic can be used with either integrated protection device or external
protection device. When the automatic reclosure is used with integrated protection device, the
internal protection logic can initiate AR, moreover, a tripping contact from external protection
device can be connected to the protection device via opto-coupler input to initiate integrated AR
function.
When external automatic reclosure is used, the protection device can output some configurable
output to initiate external AR, such as, contact of initiating AR, phase-segregated tripping contact,
single-phase tripping contact, three-phase tripping contact and contact of blocking AR. According
to requirement, these contacts can be selectively connected to external automatic reclosure
device to initiate AR.
For phase-segregated circuit breaker, AR mode can be 1-pole AR for single-phase fault and
3-pole AR for multi-phase fault, or always 3-pole AR for any kinds of fault according to system
requirement. For persistent fault or multi-shot AR number preset value is reached, the protection
device will send final tripping command. The protection device will provide appropriate tripping
command based on faulty phase selection if adopting 1-pole AR.
AR can be enabled or disabled by logic setting or external signal via binary input. When AR is
enabled, the protection device will output contact [79.On], otherwise, output contact [79.Off]. After
some reclosing conditions, such as, CB position, CB pressure and so on, is satisfied, the
protection device will output contact [79.Ready].
According to requirement, the protection device can be set as one-shot or multi-shot AR. When
adopting multi-shot AR, the AR mode of first time reclosing can be set as 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR or
1/3-pole AR. The rest AR mode is only 3-pole AR and its number is determined by the maximum
3-pole reclosing number.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
For one-shot AR or first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be selected by logic setting
[79.En_1PAR], [79.En_3PAR] and [79.En_1P/3PAR] or external signal via binary inputs. When
3-pole or 1/3-pole AR mode is selected, the following three types of check modes can be selected:
dead charge check, synchronism check and no check.
3.10.3 Logic
3.10.3.1 AR Ready
For the first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be 1-pole AR or 3-pole AR, however, the
selection is valid only to the first reclosing, after that it can only be 3-pole AR.
When logic setting [79.SetOpt] is set as “1”, AR mode is determined by logic settings. When logic
setting [79.SetOpt] is set as “0”, AR mode is determined by external signal via binary inputs.
The automatic reclosure must be ready to operate (AR ready) before performing reclosing. AR
ready means the automatic reclosure can perform at least one time of reclosing function: breaker
open-close-open.
When the protection device is energized or after the settings are modified, the following conditions
must be met before the reclaim time begins:
1. AR function is enabled
2. The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal
3. The duration of the circuit breaker closed before fault occurrence is not less than the setting
[79.t_CBClsd]
4. There is no block signal of automatic reclosure
After the automatic reclosure operates, the automatic reclosure must reset (79.Active=0) in
addition to the above conditions for AR ready again.
The logic of AR ready is shown in Figure 3.10-1.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
SIG 79.CBClsd
>=1
[79.t_CBClsd] 100ms &
SIG 79.Active >=1
OTH Any Trip

&
>=1 79.Ready
BI [79.CB_Healthy] 0ms [79.t_CBReady]

79.AR_Blkd
SIG 79.LockOut 0ms [79.t_DDO_BlkAR] >=1
EN [79.En] &
>=1
79.On
EN [79.En_ExtCtrl]
&
SIG 79.En &
SIG 79.Blk
Figure 3.10-1 Get ready logic of AR
1. 79.CBClsd
It means the circuit breaker is on closed position. Moreover the duration of the circuit breaker
closed must be greater than the setting [79.t_CBClsd].
2. 79.CB_Healthy
It is an external input via opto-coupler input to indicate the circuit breaker has enough energy to
close, and the input [79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before the automatic reclosure gets ready.
Because most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary
that circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the time delay of AR is exhausted,
AR will be blocked if the input [79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay
[79.t_CBReady]. If the function is not needed, this input can be not to configure, and its state will
be thought as “1” by default.
3. [EBI_Lockout]
It is the input signal used to block AR, which can connect with manual closing contact or tripping
contact of breaker failure protection and transformer protection. When the input is energized, the
automatic reclosure will be blocked immediately. After this input is de-energized, the blocking
condition will disappear with a time delay [79.t_DDO_BlkAR].
When the internal blocking condition of AR is met. The blocking flag of AR will be also controlled
by the internal blocking condition of AR. When the blocking flag of AR is valid, the automatic
reclosure will be blocked immediately. After the blocking flag of AR is invalid, the blocking for AR
will disappear with a time delay [79.t_DDO_BlkAR].
4. 79.t_DDO_BlkAR
It is stretching time of blocking AR. AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
AR appears, but the blocking condition of AR will drop out with a time delay [79.t_DDO_BlkAR]
after blocking signal disappears
5. 79.Active
It means that the reclosing logic is triggered. When any protection element operates to trip, this
element [79.Active] will operate until AR drop off (Reset Command)
6. Any trip
Any tripping signal from external protection device or internal protection element
7. 79.En
AR function can be enabled by internal logic settings of AR mode or external signal via binary
inputs in addition to internal logic setting [79.N_Total_Rcls].
When logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] set as “1”, AR enable are determined by external signal via
binary inputs and logic settings.
When logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] set as “0”, AR enable are determined only by logic settings.
For one-shot reclosing, if 1-pole AR mode is selected, the automatic reclosure will reset when
there is three-phase tripping signal or inputs of multi-phase open position.
3.10.3.2 AR Initiation
AR mode can be selected by external signal via binary inputs or internal logic settings. If the logic
setting [79.SetOpt] set as “1”, AR mode is determined by the internal logic settings. If the logic
settings [79.SetOpt] set as “0”, AR mode is determined by the external inputs.
1. AR initiated by line protection trip
AR can be initiated by tripping signal of line protection, and the tripping signal may be from internal
trip signal or external trip signal.
When selecting 1-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, line single-phase fault will trigger 1-pole AR. When AR
is ready to reclose (“79.Ready”=1) and the single-phase tripping command is received, this
single-phase tripping command will be kept in the protection device, and 1-pole AR will be initiated
after the single-phase tripping command drops off. The single-phase tripping command kept in the
protection device will be cleared after the completion of autoreclose sequence (Reset Command).
Its logic is shown in Figure 3.10-2.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
SIG Reset Command

& &
SIG Single-phase Trip >=1 1-pole AR Initiation
&
SIG 79.Ready
SIG 79.Sel_1PAR >=1
SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Figure 3.10-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR
When selecting 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, three-phase tripping will trigger 3-pole AR. When AR is
ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1) and the three-phase tripping command is received, this
three-phase tripping command will be kept in the protection device, and 3-pole AR will be initiated
after the three-phase tripping command drops off. The three-phase tripping command kept in the
protection device will be cleared after the completion of autoreclose sequence. (Reset Command)
Its logic is shown in Figure 3.10-3.
SIG Reset Command &

>=1
SIG Three-phase Trip
&
3-pole AR Initiation
SIG 79.Ready
SIG 79.Sel_3PAR >=1
SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Figure 3.10-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR
2. AR initiated by CB state
A logic setting [79.En_CBInit] is available for selection that AR is initiated by CB state. Under
normal conditions, when AR is ready to reclose (“79.Ready”=1), AR will be initiated if circuit
breaker is open and corresponding phase current is nil. CB state initiating AR can be divided into
initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR, their logics are shown in Figure 3.10-4 and Figure 3.10-5
respectively. Usually normally closed contact of circuit breaker is used to reflect CB state.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
SIG Reset Command
SIG Phase A open

>=1
SIG Phase B open
&
SIG Phase C open & &
& &
1-pole AR Initiation
EN [79.En_CBInit]
SIG 79.Ready
SIG 79.Sel_1PAR >=1
SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Figure 3.10-4 1-pole AR initiation
SIG Reset Command &

SIG Phase A open
&
& 3-pole AR Initiation
SIG Phase B open
SIG Phase C open
EN [79.En_CBInit]
SIG 79.Ready
EN [79.Sel_1PAR] >=1
EN [79.Sel_1P/3PAR]
Figure 3.10-5 3-pole AR initiation
3.10.3.3 AR Reclosing
After AR initiated, the protection device will output the initiating contact of AR. For 1-pole AR, in
order to prevent pole discrepancy protection from maloperation under pole discrepancy conditions,
the contact of “1-pole AR initiation” can be used to block pole discrepancy protection.
When the dead time delay of AR expires after AR initiated, as for 1-pole AR, the result of
synchronism check will not be judged, and reclosing command will be output directly. As far as the
3-pole AR, if the synchronism check is enabled, the release of reclosing command shall be subject
to the result of synchronism check. After the dead time delay of AR expires, if the synchronism
check is still unsuccessful within the time delay [79.t_wait_Chk], the signal of synchronism check
failure (SYN_Fail) will be output and the AR will be blocked. If 3-pole AR with no-check is enabled,
the condition of „synchronism check success‟ “79.Ok_Chk” will always be established. And the
signal „synchronism check success‟ “79.Ok_Chk” from the synchronism check logic can be applied

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
autoreclose function inside the protection device or external autoreclose device.
SIG 1-pole AR Initiation >=1

79.Inprog
SIG 3-pole AR Initiation
79.Inprog_1P
79.Inprog_3P
[79.t_Dd_1PS1] 0ms
>=1
[79.t_Dd_3PS1] 0ms & [AR Pulse]
&
[79.t_Wait_Chk] 0ms 79.Fail_Chk
SIG 79.Ok_Chk
Figure 3.10-6 One-shot AR
When ther is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and in excess of the time
delay [79.t_PersistTrp], the AR will be blocked, as shown in the following figure.
In case pilot protection adopting permissive scheme, when the communication channel is
abnormal, the pilot protection will be disabled. In the process of channel abnormality, an internal
fault occurs on the transmission line, the backup protection at both ends of line will operate to trip
the circuit breaker of each end. The operation time of backup protection at both ends of the line is
possibly non-accordant, whilst the time delay of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and
insulation recovery ability for transient fault, so the time delay of AR shall be considered
comprehensively according to the operation time of the protection device at both ends. When the
communication channel of main protection is abnormal (binary input [79.PLC_Lost] is energized),
and the logic setting [79.En_AddDly] is set as “1”, then the dead time delay of AR shall be equal to
the original dead time delay of AR plus the extra time delay [79.t_AddDly], so as to ensure the
recovery of insulation intensity of fault point when reclosing after transient fault. This extra time
delay [t_ExtendDly] is only valid for the first shot AR.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
[79.t_PersistTrp] 0ms 79.AR_Blkd
Single-phase Trip
>=1
SIG >=1
SIG Three-phase Trip

&
BI [79.PLC_Lost]
&
SIG 79.Active
&
Extend AR time
EN [79.En_AddDly]
Figure 3.10-7 Extra time delay control and blocking logic of long tripping time
Reclosing pulse length may be set through the setting [79.t_DDO_AR]. For the circuit breaker
without anti-pumping interlock, A logic setting [79.En_CutPulse] is available to control the
reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the protection device operates to trip during
reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto
fault. After the reclosing command is issued, AR will drop off with time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and
can carry out next reclosing.
SIG AR Pulse 0ms 50ms >=1

[AR_Out]
0ms [79.t_DDO_AR]
SIG Single-phase Trip >=1

&
SIG Three-phase Trip &
EN [79.En_CutPulse]
Figure 3.10-8 Reclosing output logic
3.10.3.4 Reclosing Unsuccessful
For transient fault, the fault will be cleared after protection device operates to trip. After the
reclosing command is issued, AR will drop off after time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out
next reclosing. When the reclosing is unsuccessful or the reclosing condition is not met after AR
initiated, the reclosing will be considered as unsuccessful, including the following cases.
1. For one-shot AR, if the tripping command is received again within reclaim time after the
reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.
2. For multi-shot AR, if the reclosing times are equal to the setting value of AR number and
the tripping command is received again after the last reclosing pulse is issued, the
reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.
3. A logic setting [79.En_FailCheck] is available to judge whether the reclosing is successful

by CB state, when it is set as “1”. If CB is still in open state with a time delay [79.t_Fail]

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
after the reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful. For
this case, the protection device will issue signal “79.Fail_Rcls” to indicate the reclosing is
unsuccessful, and this signal will drop off after “Reset Command”. AR will be blocked if
the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.
SIG Any Trip &

0ms 200ms >=1
SIG Last shot is made 79.Fail
>=1
SIG AR Pulse
&
[79.t_Fail] 0ms &
SIG CB closed
EN [79.En_FailCheck]
Figure 3.10-9 Reclosing unsuccessful
After unsuccessful AR is confirmed, AR will be blocked. AR will not enter into the ready state
unless the circuit breaker position drops off , and can only begin to enter into the ready state again
after the circuit breaker is closed.
3.10.3.5 Reclosing Numbers Control
The protection device may be set up into one-shot or multi-shot AR. Through the setting
[79.N_Total_Rcls], the maximum number of reclosing attempts may be set up to 4 times. Generally,
only one-shot AR is selected. Some corresponding settings may be hidden if one-shot AR is
selected.
1. 1-pole AR
[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1-pole AR mode, the 1-pole AR will be
initiated only for single-phase fault and the respective faulty phase selected, otherwise, AR will be
blocked. For single-phase transient fault on the line, the line protection device will operate to trip
and 1-pole AR is initiated. After the dead time delay for 1-pole AR is expired, the protection device
will send reclosing pulse, and then the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay
[79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the protection device will
operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the protection device will output the
signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1-pole AR mode, the first
reclosing is 1-pole AR, and the subsequent reclosing can only be 3-pole AR. For single-phase
transient fault on the line, the line protection device will operate to trip and then 1-pole AR is
initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the protection device will send
reclosing pulse, and then the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim]
to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again
after the reclosing is performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated. At this time, the time delay applies
the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS2]. After the time delay is expired, if the reclosing condition is met, the

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
protection device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the reclosing is
successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [79.N_Total_Rcls] is reached. If the first fault
is multi-phase fault, the protection device operates to trip three-phase and initiate 3-pole AR. At
this time, the time delay applies the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS1]. For the possible reclosing times of
3-pole AR in 1-pole AR mode, please refer to Table 3.10-1.
2. 3-pole AR
[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 3-pole AR mode, the line protection device
will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be initiated. After the
dead time delay for 3-pole AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse, and then
the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next
reclosing. For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and the protection device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 3-pole AR mode, the line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be
after the reclosing is performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off.
After the time delay for AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse. The
sequence is repeated until the reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number
[79.N_Total_Rcls] is reached.
3. 1/3-pole AR
[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1/3-pole AR mode, the line protection
device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 1-pole AR will be initiated
for single-phase fault and 3-pole AR will be initiated for multi-phase fault. After the respective dead
time delay for AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse, and then the
automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing.
For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and the protection device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1/3-pole AR mode, the line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and AR will be
after the reclosing is performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off.
After the time delay for AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse. The
sequence is repeated until the reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number
[79.N_Rcls] is reached. For the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1/3-pole AR mode, please
refer to Table 3.10-1.
The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.10-1 Number of Reclosing
1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

Setting Value
N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR
1 1 0 0 1 1 1
2 1 1 0 2 1 2
3 1 2 0 3 1 3
4 1 3 0 4 1 4
N-1AR: the number of reclosing of 1-pole AR
N-3AR: the number of reclosing of 3-pole AR
4. Coordination between dual automatic reclosure
Duplicated protection configurations are normally applied for UHV lines. If reclosing function is
integrated within line protections, the autoreclose function can be enabled in any or both of the line
protections without coordination.
If both sets of reclosing functions are enabled, when one of them first recloses onto a permanent
fault, the other will block the reclosing pulse according to the latest condition of the faulty phase.
For one-shot AR mode, if the current is detected in the faulty phase, AR will be blocked
immediately to prevent the circuit breaker from repetitive reclosing. For multi-shot AR mode, if the
current is detected in the faulty phase, the current reclosing pulse will be blocked and go into the
next reclosing pulse logic automatically. If the maximum permitted reclosing number
[79.N_Total_Rcls] is reached, the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay
[79.t_Reclaim].
For one-shot or multi-shot AR, there is a corresponding reclosing counter at each stage. After
reclosing pulse is sent, the corresponding reclosing counter will plus 1 and the reclosing counter
may be cleared by the submenu “Clear Counter”. If the circuit breaker is reclosed by other
devices during AR initiation, the automatic reclosure will go into the next reclosing pulse logic.
3.10.3.6 AR Time Sequence Diagram
The following two examples indicate typical time sequence of AR process for transient fault and
permanent fault respectively.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Fault
Trip
CB 52b
Open
79.t_Reclaim [79.t_Reclaim]
79.Active
79.Inprog
[79.t_Dd_1PS1]
79.Inprog_1P
[79.t_Dd_1PS1]
79.Ok_Chk
AR_Out
[79.t_DDO_AR]
79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Fail
Time
Figure 3.10-10 Single-phase transient fault
Fault
Trip
Open Open
52b
79.t_Reclaim [79.t_Reclaim]
79.Active
79.Inprog
79.Inprog_1P
[79.t_Dd_1PS1]
79.Inprog_3PS2
[79.t_Dd_3PS2]
79.Ok_Chk
AR_Out
[79.t_DDO_AR] [79.t_DDO_AR]
79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Fail
200ms
Time
Figure 3.10-11 Single-phase permanent fault (79.N_Total_Rcls=2)
3.10.4 I/O Signal
Input Signal Description

79.En Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
enabling AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input

Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
79.Blk
disabling AR will be controlled by the external input
79.Sel_1PAR Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker
79.Sel_3PAR Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker
Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit
79.Sel_1P/3PAR
breaker
79.Trp Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
79.Trp3P Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
79.TrpA Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
79.TrpB Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
79.TrpC Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the
79.Lockout operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection and
busbar differential protection, etc.
79.PLC_Lost The input of indicating the alarm signal that the signaling channel is lost
Waiting for the reclosing permissive signal from master (when reclosing
79.WaitToSlave
multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to
79.CB_Healthy
perform the close function
AR blocking signal of the circuit breaker which will be latched and only can
79.BlkOn
be released by the signal [79.Rls_BlkOn]
Releasing command for the AR blocking signal [79.BlkOn] of the circuit
79.Rls_BlkOn
breaker
En_3PTrp Input signal for adopting 3-pole tripping mode for circuit breaker.

79.On Automatic reclosure is enabled Yes
79.Off Automatic reclosure is disabled Yes
Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing
79.Ready Yes
cycle
79.AR_Blkd Automatic reclosure is blocked Yes
79.Active Automatic reclosing logic is actived Yes
79.Inprog Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress Yes
79.Inprog_1P The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress Yes
79.Inprog_3PS2 The first 3-pole AR cycle is in progress Yes
Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent
79.WaitToSlave Yes
to slave (when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
AR_Out Output of auto-reclosing signal Yes
Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once

79.Prep_Trp1P Yes
protection device operates
79.Prep_Trp3P Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once Yes

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
protection device operates

79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails Yes
79.Fail Synchrocheck for AR fails Yes
79.Mode_1PAR Output of 1-pole AR mode Yes
79.Mode_3PAR Output of 3-pole AR mode Yes
79.Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode Yes
Automatic reclosure counter
79.N_Total_Rcls Total Recorded number of all reclosing attempts No
79.N_Total_Rcls 1-pole Shot 1 Recorded number of first 1-pole reclosing attempts No
79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 1 Recorded number of first 3-pole reclosing attempts No
79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 2 Recorded number of second 3-pole reclosing attempts No
79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 3 Recorded number of third 3-pole reclosing attempts No
79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 4 Recorded number of fourth 3-pole reclosing attempts No
3.10.5 Settings

maximum number of reclosing
1 79.N_Rcls 1~4 1
attempts
dead time of first shot 1-pole
2 79.t_Dd_1PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
dead time of first shot 3-pole
3 79.t_Dd_3PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
dead time of second shot 3-pole
4 79.t_Dd_3PS2 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
dead time of third shot 3-pole
5 79.t_Dd_3PS3 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
dead time of fourth shot 3-pole
6 79.t_Dd_3PS4 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
time delay of circuit breaker in
7 79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
closed state before reclosing
timer started when the input
[79.CB_Healthy] is
8 79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 0.001 s de-energized and if it is not
energized within this time delay,
AR will be blocked
maximum wait time for
9 79.t_WaitChk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
synchronism check
timing allow for CB status
10 79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 0.001 s change to conform reclosing
successful
The pulse width of AR closing
11 79.t_DDO_AR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
signal

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
12 79.t_Reclaim 0.000~600.000 0.001 s reclaim time of AR
excessive trip signal timer to

13 79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
block automatic reclosing
delay reset time of AR blocking,
when blocking signal for AR
14 79.t_DDO_BlkAR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s disappears, AR blocking
condition resets after this time
delay
automatic reclosing with an
15 79.t_AddDly 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
additional dead time delay
16 79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 0.001 s maximum wait time from master
timer starts after 1-pole AR

initiated, 3-pole AR will be
initiated if another fault happens
17 79.t_SecFault 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
during this time delay. AR will be
blocked if another fault happens
after that
To enable automatic reclosing
18 79.En_PDF_Blk 0 or 1 blocked when evolving fault
occur
automatic reclosing with an
additional dead time delay
19 79.En_AddDly 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
adjust length of reclosing pulse
20 79.En_CutPulse 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
check CB state to confirm AR
successful
21 79.En_FailCheck 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
22 79.En 0 or 1 enable auto-reclosing
Automatic reclosure enabled by
23 79.En_ExtCtrl 0 or 1 external control besides logic
setting [79.En]
automatic reclosing initiated by
open state of circuit breaker
24 79.En_CBInit 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
0：None (single-breaker
arrangement)
25 79.Opt_Priority 0, 1 or 2
1：High (master AR of
multi-breaker arrangement)

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
2：Low (slave AR of
multi-breaker arrangement)
control option of AR mode
1: select AR mode by internal
26 79.SetOpt 0 or 1 logic setting
0: select AR mode by external
input
enable 1-pole auto-reclosing
27 79.En_1PAR 0 or 1
mode
enable 3-pole auto-reclosing
28 79.En_3PAR 0 or 1
mode
enable 1/3-pole auto-reclosing
29 79.En_1P/3PAR 0 or 1
mode
3.11 Trip Logic

3.11.1 Application
For any enabled protection tripping elements, their operation signal will convert to appropriate
tripping signals through trip logics and then trigger output contacts by configuration.
This module gathers signals from tripping elements and then converts the operation signal from
protection tripping elements to appropriate tripping signals. The protection device can implement
phase-segregated tripping or three-phase tripping.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.11.3 Logic
0 t_DDO_Trp
&
>=1
50BF.Op_ReTrpA t_DDO_Trp 0
SIG & TrpA
SIG Ia>0.06In
0 t_DDO_Trp
&
>=1
50BF.Op_ReTrpB t_DDO_Trp 0
SIG & TrpB
SIG Ib>0.06In
0 t_DDO_Trp
&
>=1
50BF.Op_ReTrpC t_DDO_Trp 0
SIG & TrpC
SIG Ic>0.06In
>=1
>=1 Trp
0 t_DDO_Trp
&
&
SIG Prep3PTrp >=1 >=1

t_DDO_Trp 0
& 3PTrp
SIG 3 phase trip elements
SIG Max(Ia,Ib,Ic)>0.06In
Figure 3.11-1 Simplified tripping logic
1． Prep3PTrp is the enabling signal of three-phase tripping.
2． All operation elements (except for re-tripping element) are 3 phase tripping elements.
3． [t_DDO_Trp] is the shortest period of tripping contact operation. The tripping contact shall be
reset under conditions of no current and or protection tripping element reset.
3.11.4 I/O Signal
Name Description
3 phase tripping element breaker tripping elements except line fault
Prep3PTrp enabling phase A B C breaker tripping
Name Description
TrpA Tripping phase-A circuit breaker
TrpB Tripping phase-B circuit breaker
TrpC Tripping phase-C circuit breaker

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
Trp Tripping any phase of circuit breaker

3PTrp Tripping three-phase circuit breaker
3.11.5 Settings
Table 3.11-3 Setting description

the dwell time of tripping command, empirical
1 t_DDO_Trp 0.000~1000.000 0.001 s
value is 0.04
3.12 VT Circuit Supervision

3.12.1 Application
The purpose of the VT circuit supervision is to discriminate whether VT circuit is normal. Because
some protection functions, such as distance protection, under-voltage protection and so on, will be
influenced by VT circuit failure, these protection functions should be disabled when VT circuit fails.
VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit fault,
poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The protection device can detect them and
issue an alarm signal to block relevant protection functions. However, VT circuit failure alarm
should not be issued when 1) line VT is used as protection VT and the protected line is out of
service, or 2) only current protection is enabled and VT is not connected to the protection device.
VT circuit supervision can detect failure of single-phase, two-phase and three-phase on protection
VT, supervision for automatic reclose synchronism VT circuit is also available. Under the normal
conditions, the protection device continuously supervises input voltage from VT, the VT circuit
failure signal will be activated if the residual voltage exceeds the set value or positive-sequence
voltage is lower than the setting. If the protection device is under pickup state due to system fault
or other abnormality, VT circuit supervision will be disabled.
The protection device detect residual voltage greater than 8% of Unn to determine VT circuit
failure of single-phase and two-phase, and detect positive-sequence voltage less than 30% of Unn
to, determine three-phase VT circuit failure. Upon detecting abnormality on VT circuit, an alarm
[Alm.VTS] will comes up after 1.25s and reset 10s after VT circuit restored to normal.
The VT (secondary circuit) MCB auxiliary contact as a binary input can is connected to a binary
input of the protection device. If MCB is open (i.e. [MCB_VT] is energized), the protection device
will consider the VT circuit not in a good condition and issues an alarm signal without time delay. If
the auxiliary contact is not connected to the protection device, VT circuit supervision will be with
time delay as mentioned in previous paragraph.
When VT is not connected into the protection device, the alarm signal [Alm.VTS] will be not issued
if the logic setting [VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as “1”. However, the alarm signal [Alm.VTS] is still
issued if the binary input [MCB_VT] is energized, no matter that the logic setting [VTS.En_Out_VT]
is set as “1” or “0”.

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
VTS.MCB_VT VTS.Alm
VT Circuit Supervision
3.12.4 Logic
OTH 3U0>0.08Unn
>=1
OTH 3U1<Unn & &
>=1 1.25s 10s
SIG VTS.En_Line_VT &
OTH 52b_3P
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
>=1
BI VTS.MCB_VT
&
VTS.Alm
EN [VTS.En]
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of VT circuit supervision
Unn: rated phase-to-phase voltage
3.12.5 I/O Signal
No. Input Signal Description

1 MCB_VT Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact
2 52b_3P phase A, phase B and phase C circuit breakers are closed

1 VTS.Alm Alarm signal of VT circuit failure Yes
3.12.6 Settings

1 VTS.En_Out_VT 0 or 1 No voltage used for protection calculation

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
1: enable
0: disable
In general, when VT is not connected to the
protection device, this logic setting should be
setting as “1”
The voltage used by protection calculation from
busbar VT or line VT
1: line VT
0: busbar VT
Alarm function of VT circuit supervision
3 VTS.En 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision

3.13.1 Application
The purpose of the CT circuit supervision is to determine any abnormality on CT secondary circuit.
Under the normal conditions, the CT secondary signal is continuously supervised by detecting the
residual current and voltage. If residual current is larger than 10%In whereas the residual voltage
is less than 3V, an error in CT circuit is considered, the concerned protection functions are blocked
and an alarm is issued 10s and reset 10s after the CT circuit is restored to normal.
CTS.En
CT Circuit Supervision CTS.Alm

CTS.Blk
3.13.4 Logic
OTH 3I0>0.1In &

10s 10s CTS.Alm
OTH 3U0<3V
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure

Date: 2011-04-20
3 Operation Theory
3.13.5 I/O Signal
No. Input Signal Description

1 3I0 Residual current calculated by the protection device
2 3U0 Residual voltage calculated by the protection device

1 Alm Alarm signal of CT circuit failure Yes

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4 Supervision ...................................................................................... 4-a
4.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Supervision Alarms ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Relay Self-supervision.................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3 Check Tripping Output Circuit ............................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.4 Check Setting..................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4 AC Input Monitoring ........................................................................................ 4-5

4.4.1 Voltage/current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment ........................................................ 4-5
4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 4-5
4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ........................................................................ 4-5

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision................................................................................................ 4-5
4.5.3 Synchronism Voltage Circuit Failure Supervision ............................................................... 4-5
Table of Tables
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description and handling suggestion ........................................................4-1

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision
4.1 General Description

Protection system is in quiescent state under normal conditions, and it is required to respond
promptly for faults occurred on power system. When equipment is in energizing process before the
LED “HEALTHY” is on, the equipment need to be checked to ensure no abnormality. Therefore,
the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup
and during normal operation, plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a defect is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the
equipment, the equipment will be blocked with indication and alarm of relay out of service. It is
suggested a trial recovery of the equipment by re-energization. Please contact supplier if the
equipment is still failure.
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed by a LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. The failure alarm is also recorded in event recording report
and can be printed If required.
4.2 Supervision Alarms

Hardware circuit and operation status of the equipment are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work. However, if severe hardware failure or abnormality are detected, all protection
functions will be blocked and the LED “HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output
contacts BO_FAIL will be given. The protective device then can not work normally and
maintenance is required to eliminate the failure. All the alarm signals and the corresponding
handling suggestions are listed below.
Note!
If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find
out its reason with the help of self-diagnostic record. If the reason can not be found at site,
please notify the factory NR. Please Do not simply press button “TARGET RESET” on the
protection panel or re-energize on the protective device.
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description and handling suggestion
No. Item Alarm description Handing suggestion

The signal is issued with other specific alarm
1 Fail_Device The device fails. signals, and please refer to the handeling
suggestion other specific alarm signals.
2 Alm_Device The device is abnormal. The signal is issued with other specific alarm

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision
signals, and please refer to the handeling

suggestion other specific alarm signals.
No special treatment is needed, and disable
The device is in the
3 Alm_CommTest the communication test function after the
communication test mode.
completion of the test.
Please reset setting values according to the
range described in the instruction manual,
Set value of any setting is out then re-power or reboot the equipment and
4 Alm_Setting_OvRange
of scope. the alarm message will disappear and the
equipment will restore to normal operation
state.
1. Go to the menu “Information→Borad
Info”, check the abnormality information.
Mismatch between the 2. For the abnormality board, if the board
configuration of plug-in is not used, then remove, and if the board is
5 Alm_BoardConfig modules and the designing used, then check whether the board is
drawing of an applied-specific installed properly and work normally.
project. 3. After the abnormality is removed,
re-power or reboot the device and the device
will restore to normal operation state.
Driving circuits of binary Please re-insert the corresponding binary
output relays of BO plug-in output module and re-power the equipment
6 Bxx.Fail_TrpOut
module in slot xx are after the completion of insertion, and the
damaged. device will restore to normal operation state.
Setting surveillance between
Please inform the manufacture or the agent
7 Fail_SettingSurv DSP module and MON
for repair.
module is abnormal.
Error is found during Please inform the manufacture or the agent
8 Fail_Memory
checking memory data. for repair.
1. Check CT ratio settings of each side of
transformer to be set in proper range, and if
need, please reset those settings and reboot
or re-power the device.
2. Check overexcitation settings to be set
Error is found during
9 Fail_Settings reasonable, and if need, please reset those
checking settings.
settings and reboot or re-power the device.
3. After above two steps, abnormality may
disappear. Otherwise, a hardware failue
probably ocurrs and please inform the
manufacture or the agent.
Chips are damaged and please inform the
10 Fail_DSP DSP chip is damaged. manufacture or the agent replacing the
module.
11 Bxx.Alm_OptoDC The power supply of BI 1. check whether the binary input module

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision
plug-in module in slot xx is is connected to the power supply.

abnormal. 2. check whether the voltage of power
supply is in the required range.
3. After the voltage for binary input module
restores to normal range, the “ALARM” LED
will be extinguished and the corresponding
alarm message will disappear and the device
will restore to normal operation state.
Please inform configuration engineers to
Software configuation is
12 Fail_Config check and confirm visualization functions of
incorrect.
the device
1. Please make the device out of service.
2. Then check if the analog input modules
AC current and voltage and wiring connectors connected to those
13 Fail_Sample
samplings are abnormal. modules are installed at the position.
3. Re-power the device and the device will
restore to normal operation state.
Please check secondary values and
protection settings. If settings are not set
Fault detector element reasonable to make fault detectors pick up,
14 Alm_PersistFD
operates for longer than 10s. please reset settings, and then the alarm
message will disappear and the device will
Please check secondary values and
protection settings. If settings are not set
Neutral current element reasonable to make fault detectors pick up,
15 Alm_PersistI0
operates for longer than 10s. please reset settings, and then the alarm
message will disappear and the device will
Please check the corresponding VT
secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
16 VTS.Alm Protection VT circuit fails. eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off
automatically and device returns to normal
operation state.
Please check the corresponding CT
secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
CT circuit of corresponding
17 CTS.Alm eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off
circuit breaker fails.
automatically and device returns to normal
operation state.
The auxiliary normally closed Please check the auxiliary contact of CB.
contact (52b) of After the abnormality is eliminated, “ALARM”
18 Alm_52b
corresponding circuit breaker LED will go off automatically and the device
is abnormal. returns to normal operation state.
19 Fail_SV_QF The quality factor of sample Thess alarms may be issued for electric

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision
values is abnormal. transformer applied projects. If alarms are

issued, please check working state of
merging units and the connection between
merging units and the protection device.
After maintenance is finished, please
de-energized the binary input
The device is in maintenance
20 Alm_Maintenance [BI_Maintenance] and then the alarm will
state.
disappear and the device restore to normal
operation state.
1. check whether the selected clock

synchronization mode matches the clock
synchronization source;
2. check whether the wiring connection

between the equipment and the clock
synchronization source is correct
3. check whether the setting for selecting

Time synchronization
21 Alm_TimeSync clock synchronization (i.e. [Opt_TimeSync])
abnormality alarm.
is set correctly. If there is no clock
synchronization, please set the setting
[Opt_TimeSync] as ”No TimeSync”.
4. After the abnormality is removed, the

“ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the
corresponding alarm message will disappear
and the device will restore to normal
operation state.
4.3 Relay Self-supervision
4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring

All chips on DSP module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or having errors. If
any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the alarm signal [Fail_DSP] is issued with
device being blocked.
4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring

When neutral current fault detector picks up for over 10 seconds, an alarm [Alm_PersistI0] will be
issued without protective device blocked.
When any fault detector picks up for over 10s, an alarm will be issued [Alm_PersistFD] without
protective device blocked.
4.3.3 Check Tripping Output Circuit

Chips controlling the output relays in the output circuit are continually monitored. If any error or
damage is detected in these chips, alarm [Bxx.Fail_TrpOut] will be given and the device will be

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision
blocked.
4.3.4 Check Setting

This relay has 10 setting groups, only one Setting group could be activiated (is active) at a time.
The settings of active setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are
checked to be unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued,
and protective device is also blocked.
4.4 AC Input Monitoring

4.4.1 Voltage/current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment
Zero point of voltage and current may drift due to variation of temperature or other environment
factors. The equipment continually traces the drift and adjust it to normal value automatically.
4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring

AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are monitored and if
the samples of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are detected to be wrong or inconsistent
between them, the alarm signal [Fail_Sample] will be issued and the device will be blocked.
4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision
Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,
an alarm [Bxx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued.
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision

If 52b of three phases are energized ,which indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no
current detected in the line, the line will be considered to be out of service. SOTF protection will be
enabled for 400ms.
If 52b of three phases are energized that indicates circuit breaker is open but current is still
detected in the line or three-phase circuit breaker is in pole disagreement condition, an alarm
signal [Alm_52b] will be issued with a time delay of 10s.
4.5.3 Synchronism Voltage Circuit Failure Supervision

If synchronism voltage from line VT or busbar VT is used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or
dead line or busbar check, the synchronism voltage is monitored.
If the circuit breaker is in closed state (52b of three phases are de-energized), but the synchronism
voltage is lower than the setting [25.U_Lv], it means that synchronism voltage circuit fails and an
alarm [VTS.Alm_UB] or [VTS.Alm_UL] will be issued with a time delay of 10s.
If auto-reclosing is disabled, or the logic setting [25.En_NoChk] is set as “1”, synchronism voltage
is not required and synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision will be disabled.
When synchronism voltage circuit failure is detected, function of synchronism check and dead

Date: 2011-04-20
4 Supervision
check in auto-reclosing logic will be disabled.
After synchronism voltage reverted to normal condition, the alarm will be reset automatically with a
time delay of 10s.

Date: 2011-04-20
Table of Contents
5 Meaurement and Recording............................................................ 5-a
5.1 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.1 General Description ........................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Event Recording ................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.3 Disturbance Recording ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................. 5-5

Date: 2011-04-20

Date: 2011-04-20
5.1 Measurement
PCS-921 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The relay samples
24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS value in each interval and updated the LCD display in
every 0.5 second. The measurement data can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or
on the local/remote PC via software tool. Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through
LCD screen.
This device can be used for one or two circuit breaker configuration. If it is used for two circuit
breakers configuration, some corresponding metering will be suffixed by CBn (n is the number of
the CB and it can be 1 and 2).
1. RMS Values
Access path: Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly. Select the item “Measurements “ and
press key “ENT” to enter, and then select submenu “Measurements1”. Press key “ENT” to display
corresponding measurement values as below on the LCD.
 Magnitude of three-phase protection voltage Ua, Ub, Uc (i.e. UL1)
 Magnitude of synchronism voltage (UB1, UB2 and UL2)
Please refer to “Function Description in Synchronism Check” about the definitions of UL1, UB1,
UL2 and UB2.
 Magnitude of phase current Ia, Ib, Ic (it represents the current of line, for two circuit breakers
configuration, such as one and a half breakers arrangement, it is equal to the summation of
corresponding phase currents of two circuit breakers)
 Magnitude of calculated residual current 3I0 (For one circuit breaker configuration, it is
calculated from three phase currents, i.e. 3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic. However, for two circuit breakers
configuration, it is calculated from two groups of three phase currents, i.e.
3I0=Ia1+Ib1+Ic1+Ia2+Ib2+Ic2)
 Magnitude of phase currents of two groups of CTs Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, Ia2, Ib2, Ic2 (Only displayed
for two circuit breakers configuration with two groups of CTs, for example, one and a half breakers
arrangement)
 Magnitude of residual currents of two groups of CTs 3I01, 3I02 (Only displayed for two circuit
breakers configuration with two groups of CTs, for example, one and a half breakers arrangement)
Calculated by DSP
 Frequency of protection voltage (f_Prot)
 Frequency of synchronism voltage (f_Syn)
 Frequency difference (f_Diff)
 Voltage difference (u_Diff)
Phase Angle

Date: 2011-04-20
These displayed phase angles of three-phase current and three-phase voltage are based on
phase A voltage.
 Phase angle of (Ua, Ub, Uc)
 Phase angle of (Ia, Ib, Ic)
 Phase angle of (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1) (Only displayed for two circuit breakers configuration with two
groups of CTs, for example, one and a half breakers arrangement)
 Phase angle of (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2) (Only displayed for two circuit breakers configuration with two
groups of CTs, for example, one and a half breakers arrangement)
 Phase angle difference between two synchronism voltages (phi_Diff)
No. Symbol Definition
1 Ang(Ua) Phase angle of A-phase voltage (Ua), it is taken as reference (i.e. zero degree)
Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage (Ub) relative to the reference voltage
2 Ang(Ub)
(A-phase voltage (Ua))
Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage (Uc) relative to the reference voltage
3 Ang(Uc)
Phase angle difference for A-phase current (Ia) relative to the reference voltage
4 Ang(Ia)
Phase angle difference for B-phase current (Ib) relative to the reference voltage
5 Ang(Ib)
Phase angle difference for C-phase current (Ic) relative to the reference voltage
6 Ang(Ic)
Phase angle difference for A-phase current (Ia of CT1 for CB1) relative to the
7 Ang(Ia1)
reference voltage (A-phase voltage (Ua))
Phase angle difference for B-phase current (Ib of CT1 for CB1) relative to the
8 Ang(Ib1)
Phase angle difference for C-phase current (Ic of CT1 for CB1) relative to the
9 Ang(Ic1)
Phase angle difference for A-phase current (Ia of CT2 for CB2) relative to the
10 Ang(Ia2)
Phase angle difference for B-phase current (Ib of CT2 for CB2) relative to the
11 Ang(Ib2)
Phase angle difference for C-phase current (Ic of CT2 for CB2) relative to the
12 Ang(Ic2)
13 Ang(phi_Diff) Phase angle difference between two synchronism voltages
2. Metering of the primary value
Access path:
1) Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly.

Date: 2011-04-20
2) Select the item “Measurements “ and press key “ENT” to enter, and then
3) Select submenu “Measurements3”.
4) Press key “ENT” to display corresponding measurement values as below on the LCD.
No. Symbol Definition Unit
1 LineBAY_Ua The primary value of A-phase voltage (Ua) kV
2 LineBAY_Ub The primary value of B-phase voltage (Ub) kV
3 LineBAY_Uc The primary value of C-phase voltage (Uc) kV
4 LineBAY_Uab The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uab) kV
5 LineBAY_Ubc The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Ubc) kV
6 LineBAY_Uca The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uca) kV
7 LineBAY_3U0 The primary value of calculated residual voltage (3U0) kV
8 LineBAY_Ia The primary value of A-phase current of line (Ia) A
9 LineBAY_Ib The primary value of B-phase current of line (Ib) A
10 LineBAY_Ic The primary value of C-phase current of line (Ic) A
The primary value of A-phase current of CT1 for CB1 (Only displayed for two
11 LineBAY_Ia1 A
circuit breakers configuration with two groups of CTs)
The primary value of B-phase current of CT1 for CB1 (Only displayed for two
12 LineBAY_Ib1 A
The primary value of C-phase current of CT1 for CB1 (Only displayed for two
13 LineBAY_Ic1 A
The primary value of A-phase current of CT2 for CB2 (Only displayed for two
14 LineBAY_Ia2 A
The primary value of B-phase current of CT2 for CB2 (Only displayed for two
15 LineBAY_Ib2 A
The primary value of C-phase current of CT2 for CB2 (Only displayed for two
16 LineBAY_Ic2 A
17 LineBAY_UB1 The primary value of synchronism voltage (UB1) kV
18 LineBAY_UL2 The primary value of synchronism voltage (UL2) kV
19 LineBAY_UB2 The primary value of synchronism voltage (UB2) kV
20 LineBAY_P The primary value of active power (P) MW
21 LineBAY_Q The primary value of reactive power (Q) MVar
22 LineBAY_S The primary value of apparent power (S) MVA
23 LineBAY_Cos The value of power factor (Cos) -

Date: 2011-04-20
5.2 Recording
5.2.1 General Description
PCS-921 provides the following recording functions:
1. Event recording
2. Disturbance recording
3. Present recording
All the recording information except waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing.
Waveform could only be printed or extracted with PCS-PC software tool and a waveform analysis
software.
5.2.2 Event Recording

5.2.2.1 General Description
The device can store the latest 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events and 1024 device logs. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the
available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
5.2.2.2 Disturbance Records
When any protection element operates or drops off, such as fault detector, distance protection etc.,
they will be logged in event records.
5.2.2.3 Supervision Events
The device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or abnormal
condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged in event
records.
5.2.2.4 Binary Events
When there is a binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from “0” to “1”
or from “1” to “0”, it will be logged in event records.
5.2.2.5 Device Logs
If an operator implements some operations on the device, such as reboot protective device,
modify setting, etc., they will be logged in event records.
5.2.3 Disturbance Recording

5.2.3.1 Application
Disturbance records can be used to have a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Analysis of
the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.

Date: 2011-04-20
5.2.3.2 Design
A disturbance record consists of fault record and fault waveform. A disturbance record is initiated
by fault detector element.
The disturbance record has two types:
1. Fault detector element picks up without operation of protective element
2. Fault detector element picks up with operation of protective elements.
5.2.3.3 Capacity and Information of Disturbance Records
The device can store up to 64 disturbance records with waveform in non-volatile memory. It is
based on first in first out queue that the oldest disturbance record will be overwritten by the latest
one.
For each disturbance record, the following items are included:
1. Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the record and displayed on LCD
screen.
2. Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via clock synchronized
device if connected. The date and time is recorded when a system fault is detected.
3. Relative operating time
An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the record.
4. Faulty phase
5. Protection elements
5.2.3.4 Capacity and Information of Fault Waveform
MON module can store 64 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory. If a new
fault occurs when 64 fault waveform have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest
one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 10-cycle pre-fault waveform, and 250 cycles at least and 500 cycles
at most can be recorded.
5.2.4 Present Recording

Present recording is a waveform triggered manually on on the device′s LCD or remotely through
PCS-PC software. Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance
recording.

Date: 2011-04-20
Each time recording includes 10-cycle waveform before triggering, and 250 cycles at most can be
recorded.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6 Hardware .......................................................................................... 6-a
6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only) .......................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only) ........................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Plug-in Module Description ............................................................................ 6-8

6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply) ................................................................................ 6-8
6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Management) ............................................................................... 6-10
6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input) ..................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Fault Detector and Protection Calculation) .................................... 6-21
6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV) ................................................................... 6-22
6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input) ...................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output) .................................................................................. 6-26
6.3.8 HMI Module...................................................................................................................... 6-28
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position ....................................................................6-1
Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram ................................................................................................6-2
Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921 ..........................................................................................6-3
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921 ...............................................................................6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT) ...............................................6-5
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT) .................................................................6-7
Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module ...............................................................................6-9
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module ............................................................6-9
Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module ............................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal ...........................................................6-13

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
Figure 6.3-5 Current connection of AI plug-in module .........................................................6-14
Figure 6.3-6 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module .........................................................6-14
Figure 6.3-7 View of AI plug-in module for one CT group input ..........................................6-15
Figure 6.3-8 Current connection of AI plug-in module .........................................................6-16
Figure 6.3-9 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module .........................................................6-17
Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input ........................................6-17
Figure 6.3-11 Current connection of AI plug-in module .......................................................6-19
Figure 6.3-12 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module .......................................................6-19
Figure 6.3-13 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input ........................................6-20
Figure 6.3-14 View of DSP plug-in module ............................................................................6-21
Figure 6.3-15 View of NET-DSP plug-in module ....................................................................6-22
Figure 6.3-16 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503) ...............................................................6-23
Figure 6.3-17 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504) ...............................................................6-24
Figure 6.3-18 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A) ...........................................................6-27
Figure 6.3-19 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C) ...........................................................6-27
Table of Tables
Table 6.3-1 Terminals′ definition and description................................................................6-9
Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module .........................................................................6-15

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware

PCS-921 adopts 64-bit microchip processor CPU produced by FREESCALE as control core for
logic calculation and management function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal processor
DSP for all the protection calculation. 24 points are sampled in every cycle and parallel processing
of sampled data can be realized in each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety
of protection equipment.
PCS-921 is comprised of intelligent plug-in modules, except that few particular plug-in modules’
position cannot be changed in the whole device (gray plug-in modules as shown in Figure 6.1-1),
other plug-in modules like AI (analog input) and IO (binary input and binary output) can be flexibly
configured in the remaining slot positions.
MON module
PWR module
DSP module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
BI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position
PCS-921 has 16 slots, PWR module, MON module and DSP module are assigned at fixed slots.
Besides 3 fixed modules are shown in above figure, there are 13 slots can be flexibly configured.
AI plug-in module, BI plug-in module and BO plug-in module can be configured at position
between slot B02, B03 and B06~B15. It should be pay attention that AI plug-in module will occupy
two slots.
This device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and the new
platform major characteristics are of high reliability, networking and great capability in
anti-interference great capability in anti-interference. See Figure 6.1-2 for hardware diagram.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
Output Relay
Binary Input
External
Protection
Conventional CT/VT A/D Calculation
DSP
ECVT
Fault
A/D Detector Pickup
DSP Relay
ECVT
ETHERNET
LCD +E
Clock SYN
Power
Uaux LED CPU
Supply
RJ45
Keypad
PRINT
Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram
The working process of the device is as shown in above figure: current and voltage from
conventional CT/VT are converted into small voltage signal and sent to DSP module after filtered
and A/D conversion for protection calculation and fault detector respectively (ECVT signal is sent
to the relay without small signal and A/D convertion). When DSP module completes all the
protection calculation, the result will be recorded in 64-bit CPU on MON module. DSP module
carries out fault detector, protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module perfomes
SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between
protection and SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. When fault detector detects a
fault and picks up, positive power supply for output relay is provided.
The items can be flexibly configured depending on the situations like sampling method of device
(conventional CT/VT and ECT/EVT), the mode of binary output (conventional binary output and
GOOSE binary output), and whether it needs independent binary output for pole discrepancy
protection. The configurations for PCS-900 series based on microcomputer are classified into
standard and optional modules.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-921 module configuration
No. ID Module description Remark

1 NR1101/NR1102 Management module (MON module) standard
2 NR1401 Analog input module (AI module ) standard
3 NR1161 Protection calculation and fault detector module (DSP module) standard
4 NR1503/NR1504 Binary input module (BI module) standard

5 NR1521 Binary output module (BO module) standard
6 NR1301 Power supply module (PWR module) standard
7 NR1136 GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP option

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
No. ID Module description Remark

module)
8 Human machine interface module (HMI module) standard
 MON module provides functions like management function, event record, setting
management etc.
 AI module converts AC current and voltage from current transformers and voltage
transformers respectively to small voltage.
 DSP module performs filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector calculation.
 BI module provides binary inputs, the binary inputs are opto-couplers of rating
24V/110V/125V/220V/250V (configurable).
 BO module provides output contacts for tripp[ing, and signal output contact for annunciation
signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal etc.
 PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into various DC voltage levels for modules of
the device.
 HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicators and multiplex RJ45 ports for user
as human-machine interface.
 NET-DSP module receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV) from
merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.
PCS-921 series is made of a 4U height 19” chassis for flush mounting. Components mounted on
its front include a 320×240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and a multiplex
RJ45 port. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the equipment for these functions.
Following figures show front and rear views of PCS-921 respectively.
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-9 21
2 12
ALARM BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION
3 13
4 14
GRP
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921
20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (ALARM),
others are configurable.
For the 9-button keypad, “ENT” is “enter”, “GRP” is “group number” and “ESC” is “escape”.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
1 5V OK ALM
2 BO_ALM BO_FAIL
DANGER
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921
6.2 Typical Wiring

6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only)
NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1504 NR1521A NR1521C NR1521B NR1301

MON module
PWR module
DSP module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
Power supply supervision 0801

0201
0202 Ia
0203 BI_01 + 0802

0204 Ib
*BI plug-in module can be independent common terminal

0205
…
0206 Ic
BI_06 + 0807
0213 Not used 0808
Protection Voltage
0214 Ua
BI_07 + 0809
0215
0216 Ub
…
0217
0218 Uc BI_12 + 0814
Not used 0815

0219
Synchronism Voltage
0220 UB1 BI_13 + 0816
0221
UL2
…
0222
0223 BI_18 + 0821
0224 UB2
- 0822
1101
PWR+ 0010
Controlled by fault detector

BO_01 1102
External DC power Power
supply 0011 Supply
PWR- 1103
0007 BO_02 1104
Power supply for
OPTO+ element
opto-coupler (24V) 1105
OPTO- 0008
BO_03 1106
…
1121
0001 BO_FAIL BO_11 1122
0002 BO_ALM
0003 COM 1201
0004
Signal Binary Output (option)
BO_FAIL BO_01 1202

0005 BO_ALM 1203
0006 COM BO_02 1204
1205
BO_03 1206
485-1A 0101
…
1221
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial
485-1B 0102
COM
BO_11 1222
SGND 0103
0104
1301
element and last 2 contacts without controlled by
BO_01
First 9 contacts controlled by fault detector
SYN+ 0101 1302

Clock SYN
SYN- 0102 1303

fault detector element (option)
SGND 0103 BO_02 1304

0104 1305
BO_03 1306
RTS 0105
PTINTER
PRINT
TXD 0106 1317

SGND 0107 BO_09 1318
1319
BO_10 1320
1321
0012 BO_11
Multiplex 1322
RJ45 (Front)
Grounding
Bus 0225
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT)

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and conventional binary output)
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
Module ID NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
MON AI DSP BI BI BO BO BO BO PWR
PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and GOOSE binary output)
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
Module ID NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1136 NR1504 NR1301

NET-
MON AI DSP BI PWR
DSP
6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only)
NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1503 NR1521A NR1521C NR1521B NR1301

MON module
PWR module
DSP module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
BI_01 + 0801
*BI plug-in module can be common negative

- 0802
Phase A RX BI_02 + 0803
FO interface for SV channel

SV from
ECT/EVT MU
Phase B - 0804
terminal
(LC Type)
Up to 8
Phase C TX BI_03 + 0805
- 0806
…
…
BI_11 + 0821
- 0822
PWR+ 0010 1101

External DC power Power
Controlled by fault detector

BO_01 1102
supply 0011 Supply
PWR-
1103
OPTO+ 0007
Power supply for BO_02 1104
element
opto-coupler (24V) 0008
OPTO- 1105
BO_03 1106
…
0001 BO_FAIL 1121
0002 BO_11 1122
BO_ALM
0003 COM
0004 BO_FAIL 1201
Signal Binary Output (option)

0005 BO_01 1202
BO_ALM
0006 COM 1203
BO_02 1204
485-1A 0101 1205

BO_03 1206
485-1B 0102
COM
…
SGND 0103 1221
0104 BO_11 1222
SYN+ 0101
Clock SYN
0012
SYN- 0102
SGND 0103 Grounding
0104 Bus
Multiplex
RJ45 (Front)
RTS 0105
PTINTER
PRINT
TXD 0106
SGND 0107 0225
IRIG-B
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT)
PCS-921 ECT/EVT, GOOSE binary output and binary output
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
Module ID NR1102 NR1161 NR1136 NR1504 NR1301

NET-
MON DSP BI PWR
DSP
PCS-921 ECT/EVT, conventional binary output and binary output
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
Module ID NR1102 NR1161 NR1136 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
NET-
MON DSP BI BI BO BO BO BO PWR
DSP
In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECT/EVT), the
merging unit will merge the sample data from ECT/EVT, and then send it to the device through

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
multi-mode optical fibre. DSP module receives the data from merging unit through the optical-fibre
interface to complete the protection calculation and fault detector.
The difference between the hardware platform based on ECT/EVT and the hardware platform
based on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sampled values only, and the device
receives the sampled value from merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.
6.3 Plug-in Module Description

The device consists of PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module, DSP plug-in module, AI plug-in
module, BI plug-in module, BO plug-in module and NET-DSP plug-in module. Terminal definitions
and application of each plug-in module are introduced as follows.
6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply)

PWR module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output. It
has an input voltage range as described in Chapter 2 “Technical Data”. The standardized output
voltages are +3.3V, +5V, ±12V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the output voltages are
continuously monitored.
The +3.3V DC output provides power supply for the microchip processors, and the +5V DC output
provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device.
The ±12V DC output provides power supply for A/D conversion circuits in this device, and the
+24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on PWR module. The terminal definition of the connector is described
as below.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
NR1301A
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module
Terminals′ definition and description is shown as follows:
Table 6.3-1 Terminals′ definition and description
Terminal No. Symbol Description
01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1
02 BO_FAIL Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
03 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2
05 BO_FAIL Device failure output 2 (04-05, NC)
06 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)
07 OPTO+ Positive power supply for BI module (24V)

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
08 OPTO- Negative power supply for BI module (24V)
09 Blank Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device (250/220V/125/110V)
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device (250/220V/125/110V)
12 GND Grounded connection of the device
Note!
The standard rated voltage of PWR module is self-adaptive to 88~300 Vdc. For
non-standard rated voltage power supply module please specify when place order, and
check if the rated voltage of power supply module is the same as the voltage of power
source before the device being put into service.
PWR module provides terminal 12 and grounding screw for device grounding. Terminal 12
shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent EMI, so effective
grounding must be ensured before the device is put into service.
6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Management)

MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet
controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete device, human
machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module comprises 100BaseT Ethernet
interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time synchronization
interface and RS-232 printing interface.
Modules with various combinations of memory and interface are available as shown in the table
below.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
NR1102A NR1102C NR1102B NR1102D NR1102H NR1102I NR1101E
TX TX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX RX
TX TX
RX RX
ETHERNET ETHERNET
Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module
Module ID Memory Interface Terminal No. Usage Physical Layer

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
03 SGND synchronization
NR1102A 64M DDR Twisted pair wire
04
05 RXD
RS-232 06 TXD To printer
07 SGND
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
NR1102B 64M DDR Twisted pair wire
04
05 RXD
07 SGND
01 SYN+
NR1102C 128M DDR 02 SYN- To clock Twisted pair wire
RS-485
04

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
05 RXD
07 SGND
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
NR1102D 128M DDR Twisted pair wire
04
05 RXD
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre SC
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
NR1102H 128M DDR 03 SGND synchronization
04 Twisted pair wire
05 RXD
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
NR1102I 128M DDR 03 SGND synchronization
04 Twisted pair wire
05 RXD
07 SGND
01 485-1A To SCADA
02 485-1B
RS-485
03 SGND
04
05 485-1A
06 485-1B
NR1101E 128M DDR RS-485 To SCADA Twisted pair wire
07 SGND
08
09 SYN+
10 SYN- To clock
RS-485
12
RS-232 13 RXD To printer

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
14 TXD
15 SGND
16 FGND To earth
The correct connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two pairs of
twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to connect
the “+” and “–” terminals of difference signal; the other pair of twisted pairs are used to connect the
signal ground of the interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices connected with
the bus to the twisted pair. The module reserves a free terminal for all the communication ports;
the free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device; it is used to connect the external
shields of the two cables when connecting multiple devices in series. The external shield of cable
shall be grounded at one of the ends.
Twisted pair wire

485-1A 01
485-1B 02
COM
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

SYN+ 01
Clock SYN
SYN- 02
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

RTS 05
PRINT
TXD 06
SGND 07
Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal
6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)

AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT. It is assigned to
slot numbers 02 and 03. However, the module is not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.
There are two types of AI module with rating 5 A or 1 A. Please declare which kind of AI module is
needed before ordering. Maximum linear range of the current converter is 40In.
1. One CT group input with synchronism voltage switchover
For one CT group input, three phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) and residula current from parallel line
(for mutual compensation) are input to AI module separately. Terminal 01, 03, 05 and 07 are
polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side.
Three phase voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) are input to AI module. UB1, UB2 and UL2 are the
synchronism voltage from bus VT and line VT used for synchrocheck, it could be any
phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device can automatically switch
synchronism voltage according to auxiliary contact of CB position or DS position.
If the auto-reclosing is enabled but synchronism check is not required, the synchronism voltage

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
should be disconnected.
P2 S2 P2 S2
P1 S1 P1 S1
02 01 02 01
04 03 04 03
06 05 06 05
08 07 08 07
Figure 6.3-5 Current connection of AI plug-in module
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
Figure 6.3-6 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
NR1401
Ia 01 Ian 02
Ib 03 Ibn 04
Ic 05 Icn 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
Ua 13 Uan 14
Ub 15 Ubn 16
Uc 17 Ucn 18
UB1 19 UB1n 20
UL2 21 UL2n 22
UB2 23 UB2n 24
Figure 6.3-7 View of AI plug-in module for one CT group input
Table 6.3-2 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.
Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module
Terminal No. Definition Definition

01 Ia The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)
02 Ian The current of A-phase
03 Ib The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
04 Ibn The current of B-phase
05 Ic The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
06 Icn The current of C-phase
07 Reserve
08 Reserve
09 Reserve
10 Reserve
11 Reserve
12 Reserve
13 Ua The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)
14 Uan The voltage of A-phase
15 Ub The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)
16 Ubn The voltage of B-phase
17 Uc The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)
18 Ucn The voltage of C-phase
19 UB1 The voltage of bus 1 (Polarity mark)
20 UB1n The voltage of bus 1

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware

21 UL2 The voltage of line 2 (Polarity mark)
22 UL2n The voltage of line 2
25 GND Ground
2. Two CT groups input with synchronism voltage switchover
For two circuit breakers configuration with two CT groups input, three phase currents
corresponding to CB1 and CB2 respectively (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1 and Ia2, Ib2, Ic2) are input to AI module.
Terminal 01, 03, 05, 07, 09 and 11 are polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT
installed on line is at line side.
Three phase voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) are input to AI module. UB1, UB2 and UL2 are the
synchronism voltage from bus VT and line VT used for synchrocheck, it could be any
phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device can automatically switch
synchronism voltage according to auxiliary contact of CB position or DS position.
P2 P1 P1 P2 A
S2 S1 S1 S2 C
02 01
04 03
06 05
08 07
10 09
12 11

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
A B C A B C
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
NR1401
Ia1 01 Ia1n 02
Ib1 03 Ib1n 04
Ic1 05 Ic1n 06
Ia2 07 Ia2n 08
Ib2 09 Ib2n 10
Ic2 11 Ic2n 12
Ua 13 Uan 14
Ub 15 Ubn 16
Uc 17 Ucn 18
UB1 19 UB1n 20
UL2 21 UL2n 22
UB2 23 UB2n 24
Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware

01 Ia1 The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)
02 Ia1n The current of A-phase
03 Ib1 The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
04 Ib1n The current of B-phase
05 Ic1 The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
06 Ic1n The current of C-phase
21 UL2 The voltage of line 2 (Polarity mark)
22 UL2n The voltage of line 2
25 GND Ground
3. Two CT groups input without synchronism voltage switchover
For two circuit breakers configuration with two CT groups input, three phase currents
corresponding to CB1 and CB2 respectively (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1 and Ia2, Ib2, Ic2), and residula current
from parallel line (for mutual compensation) are input to AI module. Terminal 01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11
and 13 are polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side.
Three phase voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) for protection calculation and one synchronism are input to
AI module. The synchronism voltage could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase
voltage.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
P2 P1 P1 P2 A
S2 S1 S1 S2 C
02 01
04 03
06 05
08 07
10 09
12 11
To parallel line
14 13
From parallel line
A B C A B C
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
NR1401
Ia1 01 Ia1n 02
Ib1 03 Ib1n 04
Ic1 05 Ic1n 06
Ia2 07 Ia2n 08
Ib2 09 Ib2n 10
Ic2 11 Ic2n 12
13 14
Ua 15 Uan 16
Ub 17 Ubn 18
Uc 19 Ucn 20
Us 21 Usn 22
23 24
Figure 6.3-13 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input

13 Reserve
14 Reserve

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware

21 Us Synchronism voltage (Polarity mark)
22 Usn Synchronism voltage
23 Reserve
24 Reserve
25 GND Ground
6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Fault Detector and Protection Calculation)
NR1161
Figure 6.3-14 View of DSP plug-in module
The module consists of high-performance double DSP (digital signal processor),16-digit

high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and manage other peripherals. One
of double DSP is responsible for protection calculation, and can fulfill analog data acquisition,
protection logic calculation and tripping output. The other is responsible for fault detector, and can
fulfill analog data acquisition, fault detector and providing power supply to output relay.
When the module is connected with conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through AI plug-in module. When the module is connected with ECT/EVT, it can
receive the real-time synchronous sampled value from merging unit through NET-DSP plug-in
module.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV)
NR1136A NR1136C
RX
Figure 6.3-15 View of NET-DSP plug-in module
This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), two 100Mbit/s
optical-fibre interface and two 100Mbit/s RJ-45 ethernet and other peripherals. It supports GOOSE
and SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols. It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent
control device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit).
This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected.This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.
6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input)

There are two kinds of BI modules available, NR1503 and NR1504. Up to 3 BI modules can be
equipped with on device. The rated voltage can be selected to be 24V/48V (NR1503D or
NR1504D) or 110V/220V/125V/250V (NR1503A or NR1504A). This module provides the
monitoring circuit for opto-coupler power supply.
Each BI module is with a 22-pin connector for 11 binary inputs (NR1503) or 18 binary inputs
(NR1504).
For NR1503, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler, and can be
configurable. The terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below.
[BI_n] (n=01, 02,…,11 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-PC software.)

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
NR1503
BI_01 01
Opto01- 02
BI_02 03
Opto02- 04
BI_03 05
Opto03- 06
BI_04 07
Opto04- 08
BI_05 09
Opto05- 10
BI_06 11
Opto06- 12
BI_07 13
Opto07- 14
BI_08 15
Opto08- 16
BI_09 17
Opto09- 18
BI_10 19
Opto10- 20
BI_11 21
Opto11- 22
Figure 6.3-16 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503)
For NR1504, all binary inputs share one common negative power input, and can be configurable.
The terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below. [BI_n] (n=01,
02,…,18 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-PC software.)
NR1504
Opto+ 01
BI_01 02
BI_02 03
BI_03 04
BI_04 05
BI_05 06
BI_06 07
08
BI_07 09
BI_08 10
BI_09 11
BI_10 12
BI_11 13
BI_12 14
15
BI_13 16
BI_14 17
BI_15 18
BI_16 19
BI_17 20
BI_18 21
COM- 22

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
Figure 6.3-17 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504)
Terminal description for NR 1503 and NR1504 are shown as follows respectively.
1. NR1503

01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1
02 Opto01- Negative supply of configurable binary input 1
2. NR1504

01 Opto+ Positive supply of power supply of the module
08 Blank Not used

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware

15 Blank Not used
22 COM- Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs
First four binary signals (BI_01, BI_02, BI_03, BI_04) in first BI plug-in module are fixed, they are
[BI_TimeSyn], [BI_Print], [BI_Maintenance] and [BI_RstTarg] respectively.
1. Binary input: [BI_TimeSyn]
It is used to receive clock synchronism signal from clock synchronization device, the binary input
[BI_TimeSyn] will change from “0” to “1” once pulse signal is received. When the setting
[Opt_TimeSyn] is set as “PPM(DIN)”, the device receives PPM (pulse per minute), and when the
setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as “PPS(DIN)”, the device receives PPS (pulse per second). If the
setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as other values, this binary input is invalid.
2. Binary input: [BI_Print]
It is used to manually trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_AutoPrint]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_AutoPrint]=1), report will be printed
automatically as soon as it is formed.
3. Binary input: [BI_Maintenance]
It is used to block communication export when this binary input is energized. During device
maintenance or testing, this binary input is then energized not to send reports via communication
port, local display and printing still work as usual. This binary input should be de-energized when
the device is restored back to normal.
The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for digital substation communication adopting
IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.
1) Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message
a) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.
b) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the sent message changes
to “1”.
c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and circuit
breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
d) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client
discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it correspondingly.
If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message will not be displayed on
real-time message window, audio alarm not issued, but the picture is refreshed so as to ensure
that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The maintenance message will be
stored, and can be inquired, in independent window.
2) Processing mechanism for GOOSE message
a) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by the
protection device changes to “1”.
b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test” in the
GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e [BI_Maintenance]), the
message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.
3) Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message
a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling
data in the SV message sent change “1”.
b) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling data
in the SV message received is “1”, the relevant protection functions will be disabled, but under
maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display the magnitude of sampling
data.
c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module
configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices and dual
merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in maintenance state will
not affect the normal operation of the other.
4. Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]
It is used to reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing a button
on the panel.
Note!
The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V or 250V, which
must be specified when placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated voltage of
BI module complies with site DC supply rating before put the relay in service.
6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output)

NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C modules are three standard binary output modules. The
contacts provided by NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C are all normally open (NO) contacts.
Output contact can be configured as a specified tripping output contact and a signal output contact
respectively by PCS-PC software according to user requirement.

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
NR1521A can provide 11 output contacts controlled by fault detector.
NR1521A
BO_01+ 01 01
BO_01
BO_01- 02 02
BO_02+ 03 03
BO_01
BO_02- 04 04
BO_03+ 05 05
BO_01
BO_03- 06 06
BO_04+ 07 07
BO_01
BO_04- 08 08
BO_05+ 09 09
BO_01
BO_05- 10 10
BO_06+ 11 11
BO_01
BO_06- 12 12
BO_07+ 13 13
BO_01
BO_07- 14 14
BO_08+ 15 15
BO_01
BO_08- 16 16
BO_09+ 17 17
BO_01
BO_09- 18 18
BO_10+ 19 19
BO_01
BO_10- 20 20
BO_11+ 21 21
BO_01
BO_11- 22 22
Figure 6.3-18 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A)
NR1521C can provide 11 output contacts without controlled by fault detector.
NR1521C
BO_01+ 01 01
BO_01
BO_01- 02 02
BO_02+ 03 03
BO_01
BO_02- 04 04
BO_03+ 05 05
BO_01
BO_03- 06 06
BO_04+ 07 07
BO_01
BO_04- 08 08
BO_05+ 09 09
BO_01
BO_05- 10 10
BO_06+ 11 11
BO_01
BO_06- 12 12
BO_07+ 13 13
BO_01
BO_07- 14 14
BO_08+ 15 15
BO_01
BO_08- 16 16
BO_09+ 17 17
BO_01
BO_09- 18 18
BO_10+ 19 19
BO_01
BO_10- 20 20
BO_11+ 21 21
BO_01
BO_11- 22 22
Figure 6.3-19 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C)

Date: 2011-04-20
6 Hardware
6.3.8 HMI Module

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, LED and ARM processor.
The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display module,
keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through LAN port etc. The liquid crystal
display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting, which has a
user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7 Settings ............................................................................................. 7-a
7.1 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 System Settings .............................................................................................. 7-4
7.3 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-5
7.4 Protection Settings ......................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.1 Fault Detector Settings (FD) .............................................................................................. 7-6
7.4.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P) ............................................................................. 7-6
7.4.3 Earth-fault Protection (50/51G) .......................................................................................... 7-6
7.4.4 Breaker Failure Protection Settings (50BF)........................................................................ 7-7
7.4.5 Synchrocheck Settings (25) ............................................................................................... 7-7
7.4.6 Auto-reclosing Settings (79) ............................................................................................... 7-8
7.4.7 Tripping Logic Settings ....................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.8 VTS/CTS Settings (VTS or CTS) ....................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.9 Dead zone protection (50DZ) ........................................................................................... 7-10
7.4.10 Pole Discrepancy Protection Settings (62PD) ................................................................ 7-10
7.5 Function Links .............................................................................................. 7-10
Table of Tables
Table 7.1-1 Communication settings........................................................................................7-1
Table 7.2-1 System settings ......................................................................................................7-4
Table 7.3-1 Device settings .......................................................................................................7-5
Table 7.5-1 Function links .......................................................................................................7-10

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings
The device has some setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, equipment parameters are common for
all protection setting groups.
Note!
All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
CT ratio. Zero-sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or 3U0
and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.
7.1 Communication Settings

Table 7.1-1 Communication settings
No. Item Range

1 IP_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
2 Mask_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
3 En_LAN1 0 or 1
4 IP_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
5 Mask_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
6 En_LAN2 0 or 1
7 IP_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
8 Mask_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
9 En_LAN3 0 or 1
10 IP_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
11 Mask_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
12 En_LAN4 0 or 1
13 Addr_RS485A 0~255
14 Baud_RS485A 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
15 Protocol_RS485A 0, 1 or 2
16 Addr_RS485B 0~255
17 Baud_RS485B 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
18 Protocol_RS485B 0, 1 or 2
19 Baud_Printer 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
20 En_AutoPrint 0 or 1
21 En_FastPrint 0 or 1
PPS(RS-485)
IRIG-B(RS-485)
PPM(DIN)
22 Opt_TimeSyn SNTP(PTP)
IEEE1588
SNTP(BC)
PPS(DIN)

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings
No. Item Range

NoTimeSync
23 OffsetHour_UTC -12~+12 (hrs)

24 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60 (min)
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings
 Setting Description
1. IP_LAN1, IP_LAN2, IP_LAN3, IP_LAN4
IP address of Ethernet 1, Ethernet 2, Ethernet 3 and Ethernet 4
2. Mask_LAN1, Mask_LAN2, Mask_LAN3, Mask_LAN4
Subnet mask of Ethernet 1, Ethernet 2, Ethernet 3 and Ethernet 4
3. En_LAN1, En_LAN2, En_LAN3, En_LAN4
Put Ethernet 1, Ethernet 2, Ethernet 3 and Ethernet 4 in service
They are used for Ethernet communication based on the 103 protocol. When the IEC 61850
protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.
4. Addr_RS485A, Addr_RS485B
They are the device′s communication address used to communicate with the SCADA or RTU via
serial ports (port A and port B).
5. Baud_RS485A, Baud_RS485B
Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port A or B
6. Protocol_RS485A, Protocol_RS485B
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port A or B
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: DNP3.0 protocol
2: Modbus Protocol
Note!
Above table listed all the communication settings, the device delivered to the user maybe
only show some settings of them according to the communication interface configuration.
If only the Ethernet ports are applied, the settings about the serial ports (port A and port B)
are not listed in this submenu. And the settings about the Ethernet ports only listed in this
submenu according to the actual number of Ethernet ports.
The standard arrangement of the Ethernet port is two, at most four (predetermined when

Date:2011-04-20
7 Settings
ordering). Set the IP address according to actual arrangement of Ethernet numbers and
the un-useful port/ports need not be configured. If the PCS-PC configuration tool auxiliary
software is connected with this device through the Ethernet, the IP address of the PCS-PC
must be set as one of the available IP address of this device.
7. Baud_Printer
Baud rate of printer port
8. En_AutoPrint
If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as “1”. Otherwise, it
should be set to “0”.
9. En_FastPrint
It is set as “0” for common printing with high definition, while it is set as “1” for high-speed printing.
10. Opt_TimeSyn
There are seven modes of time synchronization for user to select. The clock message via IEC103
protocol is enabled fixedly and is disabled only and only IRIG-B (RS-485) mode is enabled the
mode
 PPS(RS-485)
Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
 IRIG-B(RS-485)
IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
 PPM(DIN)
Pulse per minute (PMS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
 SNTP(PTP)
Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
 IEEE1588
Clock message via IEEE1588.
 SNTP(BC)
Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
 PPS(DIN)
Pulse per second (PMS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
 NoTimeSync
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select this option and
the alarm message [Alm_TimeSync] will not be issued anymore.

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings
11. OffsetHour_UTC, OffsetMinute_UTC
If the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, the time tags of communication messages are
required according to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is used to set the hour offset of the current time zone to the GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time) zone; for example, if a relay is applied in China, the time zone of China is
east 8th time zone, so this setting is set as “8”. The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is used to set the
minute offset of the current time zone to the GMT zone.
Time zone GMT zone East 1st East 2nd East 3rd East 4th East 5th
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5
th th th th th
Time zone East 6 East 7 East 8 East 9 East 10 East 11th
Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11
th st nd rd th
Time zone East/West 12 West 1 West 2 West 3 West 4 West 5th
Setting -12/12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
th th th th th
Time zone West 6 West 7 West 8 West 9 West 10 West 11th
Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11
7.2 System Settings

Table 7.2-1 System settings
No. Item Range Unit
1 Active_Grp 1~10
2 PrimaryEquip_ID
3 Opt_SysFreq 50,60 Hz
4 U1n 33~65500 kV
5 U2n 80~220 V
6 I1n 0~6000 A
7 I2n 1 or 5 A
1. [Active_Grp]
The number of active setting group, ten setting groups can be configured and only one is active at
a time.
2. PrimaryEquip_ID
It is intended to set Chinese character field codes (12 bits) or ASCII codes (last 6 bits), which can
be recognized by the device automatically. Such settings is used for printing messages.
3. Opt_SysFreq
Rated system frequency.
4. Un1

Date:2011-04-20
7 Settings
Primary rated voltage of VT;
5. Un2
Secondary rated voltage of VT;
6. In1
Primary rated current of CT;
7. In2
Secondary rated current of CT;
7.3 Device Settings

Table 7.3-1 Device settings
No. Item Range

1 Bxx.Un_BinaryInput 24V, 48V, 110V, 220V
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupDevice Settings
1. Bxx.Un_BinaryInput
This setting is used to set voltage level of binary input module. If low-voltage BI module is
equipped, 24V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement, and if high-voltage BI
module is equipped, 110V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
Bxx: this plug-in module is inserted in slot Bxx.
7.4 Protection Settings

All settings of protection are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT. For the specific project,
some settings relevant to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure
protection module maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what represent the settings
correspond to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure protection module
for circuit breaker 1 and circuit breaker 2 respectively.
Unn: rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage.
Un: rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
In: rated secondary current.
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsProt Settings

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings
7.4.1 Fault Detector Settings (FD)
No. Item Remark Range

1 FD.DPFC.I_Set current setting of DPFC current fault detector element (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set current setting of residual current fault detector element (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
7.4.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)

1 50/51P.k_Hm2 second harmonic compensation coefficient 0.000~1.000
current setting of stage 1 of phase overcurrent
2 50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
3 50/51P1.t_Op time delay of stage 1 of phase overcurrent element 0.000~20.000 (s)
4 50/51P1.En enable stage 1 of phase overcurrent element 0 or 1
blocking direction controlled element of stage 1 of
5 50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk phase overcurrent protection under abnormal 0 or 1
second harmonic conditions
current setting of stage 2 of phase overcurrent
6 50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
7 50/51P2.t_Op time delay of stage 2 of phase overcurrent element 0.000~20.000 (s)
8 50/51P2.En enable stage 2 of phase overcurrent element 0 or 1
blocking direction controlled element of stage 2 of
9 50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk phase overcurrent protection under abnormal 0 or 1
second harmonic conditions
7.4.3 Earth-fault Protection (50/51G)

Restrained coefficient of second harmonic
1. 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000
component
2. 50/51G1.3I0_Set Current setting for stage 1 of earth-fault protection (0.050~30.000)×In
3. 50/51G1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of earth-fault protection 0.000~20.000
Enabling or disabling stage 1 of earth-fault
protection
4. 50/51G1.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling or disabling second harmonic blocking for
stage 1 of earth-fault protection
5. 50/51G1.En_Hm2 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
6. 50/51G2.3I0_Set Current setting for stage 2 of earth-fault protection (0.050~30.000)×In
7. 50/51G2.t_Op Time delay for stage 2 of earth-fault protection 0.000~20.000

Date:2011-04-20
7 Settings
Enabling or disabling stage 2 of earth-fault

protection
8. 50/51G2.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling or disabling second harmonic blocking for
stage 2 of earth-fault protection
9. 50/51G2.En_Hm2 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
7.4.4 Breaker Failure Protection Settings (50BF)

1 50BF.I_Set current setting of phase current criterion of BFP (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
2 50BF.3I0_Set current setting of residual current criterion of BFP (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
current setting of negative-sequence current
3 50BF.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
criterion of BFP
4 50BF.t_ReTrp time delay of retrip of BFP 0.000~3600.000 (s)
5 50BF.t1_Op time delay of stage 1 of BFP 0.000~3600.000 (s)
6 50BF.t2_Op time delay of stage 2 of BFP 0.000~3600.000 (s)
breaker failure protection
7 50BF.En 1: enable 0 or 1
0: disable
re-trip function
8 50BF.En_Retrip 1: enable 0 or 1
0: disable
Residual current criterion for BFP initiated by
single-phase tripping contact
9 50BF.En_3I0_1P 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
residual current criterion for BFP initiated by phase
A B C tripping contact
10 50BF.En_3I0_3P 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
negative-sequence current criterion for BFP initiated
by phase A B C tripping contact
11 50BF.En_I2_3P 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
breaker failure protection can be initiated by
normally closed contact of circuit breaker.
12 50BF.En_CB_Ctrl 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
7.4.5 Synchrocheck Settings (25)

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings
1 25.Opt_Source_UL Selection of line voltage 0~5

2 25.Opt_Source_UB Selection of bus voltage 0~5
3 25.U_Dd The limit setting of no voltage 0.05Un~0.8Un (V)
4 25.U_LV The limit setting of having voltage 0.5Un~Un (V)
5 25.K_Usyn the voltage compensation coefficient 0.20-5.00

6 25.phi_Diff phase difference between systems at both sides 0~ 89 (Deg)
7 25.phi_Comp fixed angle difference between systems at both sides 0~359 (Deg)
8 25.f_Diff frequency difference between systems at both sides 0.02~1.00 (Hz)
9 25.U_Diff Voltage difference between systems at both sides 0.02Un~0.8Un (V)
10 25.t_DeadChk The time delay of no voltage checking 0.010~25.000 (s)
11 25.t_SynChk The time delay of synchronization checking 0.010~25.000 (s)
12 25.En_fDiffChk Enable checking frequency difference 0 or 1

13 25.En Enable synchronization checking 0 or 1
Enable the criterion of that no line voltage and no bus
14 25.En_Ddl_DdB 0 or 1
voltage
Enable the criterion of that no line voltage and having
15 25.En_Ddl_LvB 0 or 1
bus voltage
Enable the criterion of that no bus voltage and having
16 25.En_Lvl_DdB 0 or 1
line voltage
17 25.En_NoChk Can reclose breaker having no check 0 or 1
7.4.6 Auto-reclosing Settings (79)

1 79.N_Rcls Counter of breaker having reclosed 1~4
2 79.t_Dd_1PS1 The time delay of single phase breaker auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
3 79.t_Dd_3PS1 The time delay of three phase breaker auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
The time delay of 2nd three phase breaker
4 79.t_Dd_3PS2 0.000~600.000 (s)
auto-reclosing
The time delay of 3rd three phase breaker
5 79.t_Dd_3PS3 0.000~600.000 (s)
auto-reclosing
The time delay of 4th three phase breaker
6 79.t_Dd_3PS4 0.000~600.000 (s)
auto-reclosing
7 79.t_CBClsd The Min time delay of CB closeing position judgement 0.000~600.000 (s)
The time delay of waiting CB ready before
8 79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 (s)
auto-reclosing
9 79.t_Wait_Chk The Max time delay of synchronization checking 0.000~600.000 (s)
10 79.t_Fail The time delay of auto-reclosing failture checking 0.000~600.000 (s)
11 79.t_DDO_AR The broadened time delay of auto-reclosing pulse 0.000~600.000 (s)
12 79.t_Reclaim The time delay of auto-reclosing process reseting 0.000~600.000 (s)
13 79.t_PersistTrp The Max time delay of allowing tripping 0.000~600.000 (s)

Date:2011-04-20
7 Settings
The broadened time delay of blocking auto-reclosing

14 79.t_DDO_BlkAR 0.000~600.000 (s)
pulse
15 79.t_AddDly the additional time delay of auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
16 79.t_WaitMaster The time delay of later auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
17 79.t_SecFault The time delay of judging 2nd fault 0.000~600.000 (s)
Blocking auto-reclosing when fault occurs on healthy
18 79.En_pdf_bLK 0 or 1
phase under pole discrepancy situation
19 79.En_ExtCtrl Enable auto-reclosing controlled by external condition 0 or 1
20 79.En_AddDly Enable the additional time delay of auto-reclosing 0 or 1
21 79.En_CutPulse Enable the adjustment of auto-reclosing pulse width 0 or 1
Enable the auto-reclosing failure adjustment by CB
22 79.En_FailCheck 0 or 1
position
Enable the auto-reclosing adjustment by pole
23 79.En_CBInit 0 or 1
discrepancy situation
24 79.SetOpt Enable the internal auto-reclosing mode valid 0 or 1
25 79.En_1PAR Enable single-phase auto-reclosing 0 or 1
three-phase auto-reclosing mode and single-phase
26 79.En_1P/3PAR 0 or 1
auto-reclosing mode are valid
Selection of auto-reclosing priority
27 79.Opt_Priority 0, 1 or 2
0:none 1:high 2:low
28 79.En Enable auto-reclosing 0 or 1
29 79.En_3PAR Enable three-phase auto-reclosing 0 or 1
7.4.7 Tripping Logic Settings

enable auto-reclosing blocked when multi-phase fault
1 En_MPF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
happens
enable auto-reclosing blocked when three-phase fault
2 En_3PF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
happens
enable auto-reclosing blocked when selection of faulty
3 En_PhSF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
phase fails
4 En_3PTrp enable phase A,phase B and phase C breaker tripping 0 or 1
5 t_DDO_Trp the dwell time of tripping command 0.000~1000.000 (s)
7.4.8 VTS/CTS Settings (VTS or CTS)

1 VTS. En_Out_LineVT VT is not connected to the protection device 0 or 1
If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement
comes from line side (for example, 3/2 breaker), it
should be set as “1”. If three-phase voltage comes from
busbar side, it should be set as “0”.
3 VTS.En Enable alarm function of VT circuit supervision 0 or 1

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings
7.4.9 Dead zone protection (50DZ)

Current setting for dead zone protection. This setting
1 50DZ.I_Set shall ensure the protection being sensitive enough if (0.050~30.000)×In
dead zone fault occurs.
2 50DZ.t_Op Time delay of dead zone protection. 0.000~20.000
Logic setting for enabling dead zone protection.
3 50DZ.En 1: enable 0 or 1
0: disable
7.4.10 Pole Discrepancy Protection Settings (62PD)

Residual current setting of pole disagreement
1 62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
protection
Negative sequence current setting of pole
2 62PD.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
disagreement protection
3 62PD.t_Op Time delay of pole disagreement protection 0.000~3600.000 (s)
4 62PD.En Enable pole disagreement protection 0 or 1
Enable pole disagreement protection controlled by
5 62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl residual current criterion or negative sequence 0 or 1
current criterion
7.5 Function Links

Function Link is a special logic setting which is used to enable protection function. These function
links can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the function link
[Link_RmtCtrlLink]).
Each function link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection function is in
service. If the function link [Link_RmtCtrlLink] is set as “1”, through SAS or RTU, the function link
can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant protection function can be in service or out
of service through remote command.
These function links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out
of service remotely away from an unattended substation.
Table 7.5-1 Function links
No. Item Description Range

Enable remote setting modification. Set it as “0” if only
local setting modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local
1 Link_RmtChgSetting and remote setting modification are both needed. 0 or 1
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is
“1”.
2 Link_RmtCtrlLink Enable remote function links modification. Set it as “0” 0 or 1

Date:2011-04-20
7 Settings
No. Item Description Range

if only local function links modification is needed. Set it
as “1” if local and remote function links modification are
both needed.
“1”.
Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it
as “0” if only local active setting group modification is
needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote active setting
3 Link_RmtChgGrp 0 or 1
group modification are both needed.
“1”.
4 Link_01 Reserved function link 1 0 or 1
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

Date: 2011-04-20
7 Settings

Date:2011-04-20
Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface ............................................................... 8-a
8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Keypad Operation .............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 LED Indications .................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Front Communication Port ................................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Menu Tree ........................................................................................................ 8-5

8.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-5
8.2.2 Main Menus ....................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 Sub Menus ......................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3 LCD Display ................................................................................................... 8-17

8.3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.2 Normal Display................................................................................................................. 8-17
8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records ........................................................................................... 8-18
8.3.4 Display Supervision Event ............................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.5 Display IO Events ............................................................................................................ 8-20
8.3.6 Display Device Logs ........................................................................................................ 8-20
8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-21

8.4.1 View Device Measurements ............................................................................................. 8-21
8.4.2 View Device Status .......................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.3 View Device Records ....................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.4 Print Device Report .......................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.5 View Device Setting ......................................................................................................... 8-23
8.4.6 Modify Device Setting ...................................................................................................... 8-24
8.4.7 Copy Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-27

Date: 2011-04-20
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ....................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.9 Delete Device Records .................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ...................................................................................................... 8-29
8.4.11 View Module Information ................................................................................................ 8-29
8.4.12 Check Software Version ................................................................................................. 8-30
8.4.13 Communication Test....................................................................................................... 8-30
8.4.14 Select Language ............................................................................................................ 8-31
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel ............................................................................................................8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons ....................................................................................................8-1
Figure 8.1-3 LED indications ....................................................................................................8-2
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel ..................................8-3
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C...................................................8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree ..............................................................................................................8-7
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................8-3
Table 8.3-1 User Operating event list .....................................................................................8-21

Date: 2011-04-20
8.1 Overview
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-9 21
2 12
5 BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION
ALARM
3 13
4 14
GRP
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
4
8 18
1
9 19
3
10 20
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel
The function of HMI module:
No. Item Description

A 320×240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting
1 LCD conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed when there is
operation implemented.
20 status indication LEDs, 2 LEDs are fixed as the signals of “HEALTHY”
2 LED and “ALARM”, 18 configurable LEDS with selectable colour among green,
yellow and red
3 Keypad Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device
4 Communication port a multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of device
8.1.1 Keypad Operation

GR
P
ENT
ESC
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons
1. “ESC”:
 Cancel the operation

Date: 2011-04-20
 Quit the current menu
2. “ENT”:
 Execute the operation
 Confirm the interface
3. “GRP”
 Activate the switching interface of setting group
4. leftward and rightward direction keys (“◄” and “►”):
 Move the cursor horizontally
 Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu
5. upward and downward direction keys (“▲” and “▼”)
 Move the cursor vertically
 Select command menu within the same level of menu
6. plus and minus sign keys (“＋” and “－”)
 Modify the value
 Modify and display the message number
 Page up/down
8.1.2 LED Indications
HEALTHY
ALARM
Figure 8.1-3 LED indications
A brief explanation has been made as bellow.
LED Display Description

When the equipment is out of service or any hardware error is defected during
Off
HEALTHY self-check.
Steady Green Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.

Date: 2011-04-20
LED Display Description
Off When equipment in normal operating condition.

ALARM
Steady Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm is issued.
Note!
“HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device and no abnormality
detected.
“ALARM” LED is turned on when abnormalities of device occurs like above mentioned
and can be turned off after abnormalities are removed except alarm report [CTS.Alm]
which can only be reset only when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted or
re-energized.
Other LED indicators with no labels are configurable and user can configure them to be lit
by signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to
requirement through PCS-PC software.
8.1.3 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel
In the above figure and the following table:
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable

Date: 2011-04-20
Terminal Device side Computer side

Core color Function
No. (Left) (Right)
1 Orange TX+ of the ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange & white TX- of the ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P1-7 P3-5
8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-PC) after
connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-PC). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.

Date: 2011-04-20
NR1102C
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
SYN+
SYN-
SGND
GND
RXD
TXD
SGND
GND
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C
Note!
If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be
set as “1”.
8.2 Menu Tree

8.2.1 Overview
Press “▲” of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and
“▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous
menu. Press “ESC” back to main menu directly. For sake of entering the command menu again, a
command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its execution. Five latest command
menus can be recorded in the quick menu. When five command menus are recorded, the latest
command menu will cover the earliest one, adopting the “first in first out” principle. It is arranged
from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Date: 2011-04-20
MainMenu
Language
Clock
Quick Menu
For the first powered protective device, there is no record in quick menu. Press “▲” to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
The descriptions about menu is based on the maximized configuration, for a specific project, if
some function is not available, the corresponding submenu will hidden.
8.2.2 Main Menus

The menu of the PCS-921 is organized into main menu and submenus, much like a PC directory
structure. The menu of the PCS-921 is divided into 10 sections:

Date: 2011-04-20
Main Menu
Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Loca Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree
Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all main menus under menu tree of the protection device.
8.2.3 Sub Menus

8.2.3.1 Measurements
Main Menu
Measurements
Measurements1
Measurements2
Measurements3
This menu is used to display real-time measured values, including AC voltage, AC current, phase
angle and calculated quantities. These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This
menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to “section measurement” about the detailed
measured values.
No. Item Function description
1 Measurement1 Display measured values from protection calculation DSP (Displayed by

Date: 2011-04-20
secondary value)
Display sampled values from fault detector DSP (Displayed by

2 Measurement2
secondary value)
3 Measurement3 Display measured primary values and other calculated quantities
8.2.3.2 Status
Main Menu
Status
Inputs
Contact Inputs
GOOSE Inputs
Outputs
Contact Outputs
GOOSE Outputs
Superv State
Prot Superv
FD Superv
GOOSE Superv
SV Superv
This menu is used to display real time input signals, output signals and alarm signals of the device.
These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This menu comprises following
submenus. Please refer to “section signal list” about the detailed inputs, output and alarm signals.
1 Inputs Display all input signal states
2 Outputs Display all output signal states
3 Superv State Display supervision alarm states
The submenu “Inputs” comprises the following command menus.
1 Contact Inputs Display states of binary inputs derived from opto-isolated channels
2 GOOSE Inputs Display states of GOOSE binary inputs.

Date: 2011-04-20
The submenu “Outputs” comprises the following command menus.
1 Contact Outputs Display states of contact binary outputs
2 GOOSE Outputs Display states of GOOSE binary outputs
The submenu “Superv State” comprises the following command menus.
1 Prot Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from protection calculation DSP
2 FD Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from fault detector DSP
3 GOOSE Superv Display states of GOOSE self-supervision signals
4 SV Superv Display states of SV self-supervision signals
8.2.3.3 Records
Main Menu
Records
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Logs
Clear_Records
This menu is used to display all kinds of records, including the disturbance records, supervision
events, binary events and device logs, so that the operator can load to view and use as the
reference of analyzing accidents and repairing the device. All records are stored in non-volatile
memory, it can still record them even if it loses its power.
This menu comprises the following submenus.

1 Disturb Records Display disturbance records of the device
2 Superv Events Display supervision events of the device
3 IO Events Display binary events of the device
4 Device Logs Display device logs of the device
5 Clear Records Clear all recods.

Date: 2011-04-20
8.2.3.4 Settings
Main Menu
Settings
System Settings
Prot Settings
Logic Links
Function Links
GOOSE Links
SV Links
Spare Links
Device Setup
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
Copy Settings
This menu is used to check the device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic
links settings, as well as modifying any of the above setting items. Moreover, it can also execute
the setting copy between different setting groups.
1 System Settings Check or modify the system parameters
2 Prot Settings Check or modify the protection settings
Check or modify the logic links settings, including function links, SV links,
3 Logic Links
GOOSE links and spare links
4 Device Setup Check or modify the device setup
5 Copy_Settings Copy setting between different setting groups
The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
1. FLE Settings Check or modify feeder line end fault protection settings
2. 50P Settings Check or modify phase overcurrent protection settings
3. 87S Settings Check or modify current differential protection settings

Date: 2011-04-20
The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.
1 Function Links Check or modify function links settings
2 GOOSE Links Check or modify GOOSE links settings
3 SV Links Check or modify SV links settings
4 Spare Links Check or modify spare links settings (used for programmable logic)
The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Check or modify the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Check or modify the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Check or modify the label settings of each protection element.

Date: 2011-04-20
8.2.3.5 Print
Main Menu
Print
Device Info
Settings
System Settings
Prot Settings
Logic Links
Function Links
GOOSE Links
SV Links
Spare Links
Device Setup
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
All Settings
Latest Modified
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Statues
Waveform
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print
This menu is used to print device description, settings, all kinds of records, waveform, information
related with IEC60870-5-103 protocol, channel state and channel statistic.
Print the description information of the device, including software

1. Device Info
version.

Date: 2011-04-20
Print device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic

links settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all
2. Settings
settings of the device. Besides, it can also print the latest modified
settings.
3. Disturb Records Print the disturbance records
4. Superv Events Print the supervision events
5. IO Events Print the binary events
Print the current state of the device, including the sampled value of
6. Device Statues
voltage and current, the state of binary inputs, setting and so on
7. Waveform Print the recorded waveform
Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN),

8. IEC103 Info information serial number (INF), general classification service group
number, and channel number (ACC)
9. Cancel Print Cancel the print command
The submenu “Settings” comprises the following submenus.
1 System Settings Print the system parameters
2 Prot Settings Print the protection settings
3 Logic Links Print the logic links settings
4 Device Setup Print the settings related to device setup
Print all settings including device setup, system parameters, protection

5 All Settings
settings and logic links settings
6 Latest Modified Print the setting latest modified
The submenu “Prot Settings” comprises the following command menus.
1. FLE Settings Print feeder line end fault protection settings
2. 50P Settings Print phase overcurrent protection settings
3. 87S Settings Print current differential protection settings
The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.
1 Function Links Print function links settings
2 GOOSE Links Print GOOSE links settings
3 SV Links Print SV links settings
4 Spare Links Print spare links settings (used for programmable logic)
The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.

Date: 2011-04-20
1 Device Settings Print the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Print the label settings of each protection element.
8.2.3.6 Local Cmd
Main Menu
Local_Cmd
Reset Target
Trig Oscillograph
Download
Clear Counter
This menu is used to reset the tripping relay with latch, indicator LED, LCD display, and as same
as the resetting function of binary inputs. This menu provides a method of manually recording the
current waveform data of the device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.
Besides, it can send out the request of program download, clear statistic information about
GOOSE and SV.
1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, indicator LED, LCD display and so on
2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording
3 Download Send out the request of downloading program
4 Clear Counter Clear all statistic data
8.2.3.7 Information
Main Menu
Information
Version Info
Board Info
In this menu, the LCD displays software information of all kinds of intelligent plug-in modules,
which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence
number. Besides, plug-in module information can also be viewed.

Date: 2011-04-20
This menu comprises the following command menus.
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.
2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
8.2.3.8 Test
Main Menu
Test
GOOSE Comm Counter
SV Comm Counter
Device Test
Prot Elements
All Test
Select Test
Superv Events
All Test
Select Test
IO Events
All Test
Select Test
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the
protection device. It can be used to fulfill the communication test function. It is also used to
generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to
debug the communication on site. Besides, it can also display statistic information about GOOSE
and SV.
1. GOOSE Couters Check communication statistics data of GOOSE
2. SV Couters Check communication statistics data of SV (Sampled Values)

Date: 2011-04-20
Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to SCADA,

including disturbance records, self-supervision events and binary events. It can
3. Device Test
realize the report uploading by different classification, as well as the uploading
of all kinds of reports
The submenu “Device Test” comprises the following submenus.
View the relevant information about disturbance records (only used for
1 Protection Elements
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about supervision events (only used for
2 Superv Events
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about binary events (only used for debugging
3 IO Events
persons)
Users can respectively execut the test automatically or manually by selecting commands “All Test”
or “Select Test”.
The submenu “Prot Elements” comprises the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements
2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification
The submenu “Superv Events” comprises the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions
The submenu “IO Events” comprises the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs
8.2.3.9 Clock
The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.3.10 Language
This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language.

Date: 2011-04-20
8.3 LCD Display

8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm
reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will
not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the “RESET” button in the
protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both “ENT” and
“ESC” at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.
IO events will be displayed for 5s and then it will return to the previous display interface
automatically. Device logs will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding
menu.
8.3.2 Normal Display

After the protection device is powered and entered into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds
to complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
“HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following. The LCD adopts white color as its
backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished
automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.
2010-06-08 10:10:00
Ia 0.00A
Ib 0.00A
Ic 0.00A
3I0 0.00A
Ua 0.02V
Ub 0.00V
Uc 0.00V
3U0 0.02V
UB1 0.00V
UL2 0.00V
UB2 0.00V
f_Line 50.00Hz
Addr 24343 Group 01
The content displayed on the screen contains: the current date and time of the protection device
(with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the active setting group number, the three-phase
current sampling value, the neutral current sampling value, the three-phase voltage sampling
value, the neutral voltage sampling value, the synchronism voltage sampling value, line frequency
and the address relevant to IP address of Ethernet A. If all the sampling values of the voltage and
the current can’t be fully displayed within one screen, they will be scrolling-displayed automatically
from the top to the bottom.

Date: 2011-04-20
If IP address of Ethernet A is “xxx.xxx.a.b”, the displayed address equals to (a×256+b). For

example, If IP address of Ethernet A is “198.087.095.023”, the displayed address will be “95×
256+23=24343”.
If the device has detected any abnormal state, it′ll display the self-check alarm information.
8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records

This device can store 1024 disturbance records and 64 disturbance records with fault waveform.
When there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest
disturbance record, and two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on
whether there are supervision events at present.
For the situation that the disturbance records and the supervision events coexist, the upper half
part is the disturbance record, and the lower half part is the supervision event. As to the upper half
part, it displays separately the record number of the disturbance record, fault name, generating
time of the disturbance record (with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss), protection element and
tripping element. If there is protection element operation, faulty phase and relative operation time
with reference to fault detector element are displayed. At the same time, if displayed rows of
protection element and tripping element are more than 3, a scroll bar will appear at the right. The
height of the black part of the scroll bar basically indicates the total lines of protection element and
tripping element, and its position suggests the position of the currently displayed line of the total
lines. The scroll bar of protection element and tripping element will roll up at the speed of one line
per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it will roll from the earliest protection element and
tripping element again. The displayed content of the lower half part is similar to that of the upper
half part.
If the device has no the supervision event, the display interface will only show the disturbance
record.
1. Disturb Records NO.2

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200
0 ms DPFC.Pkp
24 ms A 21Q.Z1.Op
If the device has the supervision event, the display interface will show the disturbance record and
the supervision event at the same time.

Date: 2011-04-20
1. Disturb Records NO.2

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200
0 ms DPFC.Pkp
24 ms A 21Q.Z1.Op
2. Superv Events NO.3

2008-11-28 07:09:00:200
Alm_52b
Disturb Records NO.2 shows the title and SOE number of the disturbance record.
2008-11-28 07:10:00:200 shows the time when fault detector picks up, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond.
0ms DPFC.Pkp shows fault detector element and its operating time (set as 0ms
fixedly).
24ms A 21Q.Z1.Op shows operation element and its relative operation time
8.3.4 Display Supervision Event

This device can store 1024 pieces of supervision events. During the running of the device, the
supervision event of hardware self-check errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.
2. Superv Events NO.4

2008-12-29 9:18:47:500ms
Alm_52b 0 1
Superv_Events NO.4 shows the SOE number and title of the supervision event

Date: 2011-04-20
2008-11-28 09:18:47:500 shows the real time of the report: year–month-date and
hour:minute:second:millisecond
Alm_52b 0→1 shows the content of abnormality alarm
8.3.5 Display IO Events

This device can store 1024 pieces of binary events. During the running of the device, the binary
input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e. from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”.
3. IO Events NO.4
2008-11-29 09:18:47:500ms
BI_RstTarg 0 1
IO Events NO.4 shows the number and title of the binary event
2008-11-28 09:18:47:50 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
BI_RstTarg 0→1 shows the state change of binary input, including binary input
name, original state and final state
8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This device can store 1024 pieces of device logs. During the running of the device, the device log
will be displayed after any operation of it is conducted.

Date: 2011-04-20
4. Device Logs NO.4

2008-11-28 10:18:47:569ms
Reboot
Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the device log
2008-11-28 10:18:47:569 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Reboot shows the manipulation content of the device log
User operating information listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.3-1 User Operating event list
No. Message Description

1 Reboot The device has been reboot.
2 Settings_Chg The device′s settings have been changed.
3 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
4 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (Device logs can not be deleted)
5 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
6 SubProcess_Exit A Subprocess has exited.
It will be displayed on the LCD before the fault report and self-check report are confirmed. Only
pressing the restore button on the protection screen or pressing both “ENT” and “ESC” at the
same time can switch among the fault report, the self-check report and the normal running state of
protection device to display it. The binary input change report will be displayed for 5s and then it
will return to the previous display interface automatically.
8.4 Keypad Operation

8.4.1 View Device Measurements
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then press

Date: 2011-04-20
the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);
5. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;
6. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu);
8.4.2 View Device Status

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
the key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).
8.4.3 View Device Records

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down;
5. Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record;
7. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu);
8.4.4 Print Device Report


Date: 2011-04-20
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the “ENT” or
“►” to enter the menu;
 Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious
or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”,
and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer
doesn’t complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will
display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”).
 Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the
key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
4. If selecting the command menu “Device Info”, “Device Status“ or “IEC103_Info”,

press the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this
menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
5. If selecting the “Settings”, press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the next level of menu.
6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and
then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. If selecting any item to
printing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to be printed. After pressing the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).
7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the waveform
item to be printed and press ”ENT” to enter. If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will
display “No Waveform Data!” (Before executing the command menu “Waveforms”, it is
necessary to execute the command menu “Trig Oscillograph” in the menu “Local Cmd”,
otherwise the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”). With waveform data existing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD
will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and
the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Waveforms”).
8.4.5 View Device Setting


Date: 2011-04-20
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;
5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;
7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
Note!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.
8.4.6 Modify Device Setting

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;
5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;
7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” );
8. If selecting the command menu “System Settings”, move the cursor to the setting
item to be modified, and then press the “ENT”;
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the “◄” or “►”
to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value), press the
“ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu
“System Settings”. Press the “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed
interface of the command menu “System Settings”).
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press the “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”. Directly press the “ESC” or

Date: 2011-04-20
press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the “Cancle”, and then press the “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu “System
Settings”).
Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the “ENT”, all modified setting item
will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the “ENT”, the LCD will
display password input interface.
Please Input Password:
____
Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” or “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,
and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface
of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is correct, LCD will display “Save
Setting Now…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu “System Settings”), with all modified setting items as modified values.
Note!
For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification
methods are the same. The following is ditto.
9. If selecting the submenu “Prot Settings”, and press “ENT” to enter. After selecting
different command menu, the LCD will display the following interface: (take “FD
Settings” as an example)

Date: 2011-04-20
FD Settings
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group : 01
Selected Group : 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ENT” to enter it. Move the cursor to
the setting item to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter.
Take the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set] as an example is selected to modify, then press the “ENT” to
enter and the LCD will display the following interface. is shown the “＋” or “－” to modify the value
and then press the “ENT” to confirm.
FD.DPFC.I_Set
Current Value 0.200
Modified Value 0.202
Min Value 0.050
Max Value 30.000
Note!
After modifying protection settings in current active setting group or system parameters of
the device, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the device will go out, and the device will
automatically restart and re-check them. If the check doesn’t pass, the device will be
blocked.

Date: 2011-04-20
8.4.7 Copy Device Setting

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
Copy Settings
Active Group: 01
Copy To Group: 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the “ESC”, and return to the menu “Settings”.
Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,
continue inputting it, press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the menu
“Settings”. If the password is correct, the LCD will display “copy setting OK!”, and exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Settings”).
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group

1. Exit the main menu;
2. Press the “GRP”

Date: 2011-04-20
Change Active Group
Active Group: 01
Change To Group: 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to
the main menu). After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the
password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input
interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp
of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If
the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD
will return to its original state.
8.4.9 Delete Device Records

1. Exit the main menu;
2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and “ENT”; Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to
the original state). Press the “ENT” to carry out the deletion.
Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit

Date: 2011-04-20
Note!
The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the protection
device, including disturbance records, supervision events, binary events, but not including
device logs. Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of
the function shall be cautious.
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the “ENT”
to enter clock display
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;
4. Press the “+” or “-” to modify value, and then press the “ENT” to save the modification
and return to the main menu;
5. Press the “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.
Clock
Year 2008
Month 11
Day 28
Hour 20
Minute 59
Second 14
8.4.11 View Module Information

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and then
press the “ENT” to enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar;

Date: 2011-04-20
5. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.12 Check Software Version

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the submenu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and
then press the key “ENT” to display the software version.
4. Press the “ESC” to return to the main menu.
8.4.13 Communication Test

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the submenu “Device Test”, and then
press the key “ENT” to enter the submenu,to select test item. If “Prot Elements” “Superv
Events” or “IO Events” is selected, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are
provided.
Prot Element
All Test
Select Test
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu
“All Test” or “Select Test”. If selecting the “All Test”, press the “ENT”, and the device will
successively carry out all operation element message test one by one.
5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down,
and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the

Date: 2011-04-20
corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding message.
Note!
If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and
return to the “Test” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication Test
Timeout and Exiting...”.
Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “TEST”, at this moment, the LCD will
display “Communication Test Exiting…”.
8.4.14 Select Language

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Language”, and
then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on
LCD.
Please Select Language:
1 中文
2 English
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the language user preferred and press
the key “ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD
will return to the menu “Language”, and the display language is changed. Otherwise,
press the key “ESC” to cancel language switching and return to the menu “Language”.
Note!
LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for explaining
specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual device may be some
different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.

Date: 2011-04-20

Date: 2011-04-20
Table of Contents
9 Configurable Function..................................................................... 9-a
9.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software.................................................................. 9-1
9.3 Protective Device Configuration .................................................................... 9-1
9.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators ......................................................................................... 9-1
9.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input.............................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output ........................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.4 Setting Configuration ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4 Signal List ........................................................................................................ 9-4

9.4.1 Input Signal ........................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.4.2 Output Signal ..................................................................................................................... 9-7
List of Tables
Table 9.4-1 Input signal .............................................................................................................9-4
Table 9.4-2 Output signal ..........................................................................................................9-7

Date: 2011-04-20

Date: 2011-04-20
By adoption of PCS-PC software, it is able to make system configuration, function configuration,

binary input and binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and programming logic
for PCS-921.
9.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software
PCS-PC software is developed in order to meet customer‟s demand on functions of UAPC

platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customer‟s demand. Please refer to Instruction
Manual of PCS-PC Auxiliary Software for details.
Overall functions:
 Programmable logic (off-line function)
 System configuration (off-line function)
 Function configuration (off-line function)
 LED indicators configuration (off-line function)
 Binary signals configuration (off-line function)
 Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)
 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)
 Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)
 Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)
 File downloading/uploading (on-line function)
9.3 Protective Device Configuration
9.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators

1. This protection device provides 20 LED indicators, 2 LED indicators are defined as,
“HEALTHY” LED and “ALARM“ LED, the rest 18 LEDs can be configured by users as
required.
2. The column “ ” in the right hand side of PCS_PC software/Binary

Date: 2011-04-20
signal config/LED_indicator_configuration provides elements including protection elements,

alarm elements and binary input elements for LEDs.
3. “Latched” check boxes with the LEDS are available. When a check box is selected, the
respective LED could only be reset by energizing [BI_RstTarg] once it is lit. If the check box is
not selected, the signals will reset automatically once the trigger signal resets.
4. The column “ ” is used to choose color for each LED. “yellow”, “green” and “red” are
provided to choose from.
5. If the “LED_5” is used to indicate the device ready for AR of CB1, configure it as the following
picture.
6. The label of the “LED_5” can be edited by double-click it.
7. The signal in the column of “Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to execute
“delete” command.
9.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input
1. Pin number of user-defined binary input on module is provided by the column “ ”
on the left of the interface.
2. The next step is to set delay pick up and drop off time in the columns of “ ” and
“ ” (unit: ms) respectively for individual binary inputs.
3. The column “ ” at the right hand side of the screen is a

list of functions available for selection to individual binary inputs. They can be directly dragged
from the list to assigned binary input.
4. The signal in the column of “Int. Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to

Date: 2011-04-20
execute delete command.
5. The displayed content of the column “ ” can be modified according to user‟s

requirement.
9.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output

1. The function is applied for configuration of binary outputs of BO modules (NR1521) of the
protective device. There are up to 44 configurable binary output contacts.
2. Elements in the column “ ” at the right hand side of the screen

can be dragged to point to a or several binary output contacts. The optional signals include:
Trip Elements, Alarm, Binary Change and Other Type (Reserved or spare).
3. For example, the contact “ ” is intended for closing CB1, the

corresponding output signal in the right tree structure is then dragged to the position at the
crossing of column „Int. Signal‟ and row “Board11_Pin07-08”.
4. The signal added in the column of “Int. Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click
to execute delete command.
5. The displayed content of the column “ ” can be modified according to user‟s

requirement.

Date: 2011-04-20
9.3.4 Setting Configuration

After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is hidden in device and in
setting configuration list of PCS-PC software.
Users can configure the equipment parameters, system settings and etc.
Users can select to show or hide some setting, and modify typical setting values
9.4 Signal List
9.4.1 Input Signal

All input signal for this device are listed in the following table (The value of any signal not
configured retains the default value).
For the specific project, some signals relevant to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module
and breaker failure protection module are with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” for circuit breaker 1
and circuit breaker 2 respectively.
No. Item Default Value Description

Circuit Breaker Position Supervision
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of corresponding
1 52b_PhA 0
circuit breaker
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of corresponding
2 52b_PhB 0
circuit breaker
3 52b_PhC 0 Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of corresponding

Date: 2011-04-20
circuit breaker
4 52b 0 Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker
5 52a 0 Normally open contact of three-phase of circuit breaker
6 TCCS.Input 0 Control circuit failure
Phase Overcurrent Protection
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it can
7 50/51Px.En1 1
be binary inputs or logic links.
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it can
8 50/51Px.En2 1
be binary inputs or logic link.
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, such as
9 50/51Px.Blk 0
When the input is 1, phase overcurrent protection is reset and
time delay is cleared.
Earth-fault Protection
Stage x of residual overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it
10 50/51Gx.En1 1
can be binary inputs or logic links.
Stage x of residual overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it
11 50/51Gx.En2 1
can be binary inputs or logic link.
Stage x of residual overcurrent protection blocking input, such
as function blocking binary input.
12 50/51Gx.Blk 0
When the input is 1, residual overcurrent protection is reset and
time delay is cleared.
Dead Zone Protection
Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it can be binary inputs or
13 50DZ.En1 1
logic links.
Dead zone protection enabling input 2, it can be binary inputs or
14 50DZ.En2 1
logic link.
Dead zone protection blocking input, such as function blocking
binary input.
15 50DZ.Blk 0
When the input is 1, dead zone protection is reset and time
delay is cleared.
Synchronism Check
16 25.MCB_VT_UB 0 Normally closed (NC) contact of MCB of protection voltage
17 25.MCB_VT_UL 0 Normally closed (NC) contact of MCB of synchronism voltage
Input signal for blocking synchronism check and dead check for
18 25.Blk_Chk 0
AR of corresponding circuit breaker
Input signal for blocking synchronism check for AR of
19 25.Blk_SynChk 0
corresponding circuit breaker
Input signal for blocking dead check for AR of corresponding
20 25.Blk_DdChk 0
circuit breaker
21 25.Blk_VTS_Prot 0 Input signal for blocking VTS function of protection voltage
22 25.Blk_VTS_Syn 0 Input signal for blocking VTS function of synchronism voltage
Auto-reclosure

Date: 2011-04-20
23 79.En 1 Input signal for enabling AR of corresponding circuit breaker

24 79.Blk 0 Input signal for disabling AR of corresponding circuit breaker
Input signal of manually closing the corresponding circuit
25 79.ManCls 0
breaker
Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding
26 79.Sel_1PAR 0
circuit breaker
Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding
27 79.Sel_3PAR 0
circuit breaker
Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding
28 79.Sel_1P/3PAR 0
circuit breaker
Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to
29 79.Trp 0
initiate AR
Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to
30 79.Trp3P 0
initiate AR
Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate
31 79.TrpA 0
AR
Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate
32 79.TrpB 0
AR
Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate
33 79.TrpC 0
AR
Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with
34 79.Lockout 0 the operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer
protection and busbar differential protection, etc.
Input signal for blocking AR of the corresponding circuit breaker
35 79.BlkOn 0 which will be latched and only can be released by the signal
([79.Rls_BlkOn])
Input signal for releasing AR blocking signal of the
36 79.Rls_BlkOn 0
corresponding circuit breaker ([79.BlkOn])
Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that the carrier
37 79.PLC_Lost 0
channel is lost
Input signal for waiting for the reclosing permissive signal from
38 79. WaitMaster 0
master (when reclosing dual circuit breakers)
Input signal for confirming whether circuit breaker is healthy to
39 79.CB_Healthy 1
perform switching
External A-phase tripping signal for corresponding circuit
40 50BF.ExTrpA 0
breaker
External B-phase tripping signal for corresponding circuit
41 50BF.ExTrpB 0
breaker
External C-phase tripping signal for corresponding circuit
42 50BF.ExTrpC 0
breaker
43 50BF.ExTrp3P_L 0 External three-phase tripping signal from line protection
44 50BF.ExTrp3P_GT 0 External three-phase tripping signal from transformer, generator

Date: 2011-04-20
or reactor protection
Input signal for initiating breaker failure protection by normally
45 50BF.ExTrp_WOI 0
closed contact of circuit breaker
46 VTS.MCB_VT 0 Input signal for indicating protection VT is out of service
CT Circuit Supervision
47 CTS.Blk 0 Input signal for blocking CT circuit supervision
9.4.2 Output Signal

All output signal for this device have been listed in the following table.
No. Signal Description

Earth-fault protection
1 50/51Gx.Op Operation signal of stage x of earth-fault protection
2 50/51Gx.St Pickup signal of stage x of earth-fault protection
Dead Zone Protection
3 50DZ.St dead zone protection starts.
4 50DZ.Op dead zone protection operates.
5 50BF.Op_ReTrpA Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker
6 50BF.Op_ReTrpB Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker
7 50BF.Op_ReTrpC Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker
8 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker
9 50BF.Op_t1 Stage 1 breaker failure protection operates
10 50BF.Op_t2 Stage 2 breaker failure protection operates
Pole discrepancy Protection
11 62PD.Op Operation signal of pole discrepancy protection
12 62PD.St Pickup signal of pole discrepancy protection
Phase Overcurrent Protection
13 50/51P1.Op Operation signal of stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection
14 50/51P2.Op Operation signal of stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection
15 50/51P1.St Pickup signal of stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection
16 50/51P2.St Pickup signal of stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection
Operation signal of breaker failure protection operating to retrip A-phase
17 50BF.Op_ReTrpA
circuit breaker
Operation signal of breaker failure protection operating to retrip B-phase
18 50BF.Op_ReTrpB
circuit breaker
Operation signal of breaker failure protection operating to retrip C-phase
19 50BF.Op_ReTrpC
circuit breaker
Operation signal of breaker failure protection operating to retrip three-phase
20 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P
circuit breaker

Date: 2011-04-20
21 50BF.Op_t1 Operation signal of breaker failure protection with first time delay
Operation signal of breaker failure protection with second time delay (It will
22 50BF.Op_t2
drop off once the operating condition is not met)
Synchronism Check
23 f_Line Line voltage frequence
24 f_Bus Busbar voltage frequence
25 phi_Diff Angle difference between protection voltage and synchronism voltage
26 f_Diff Frequency difference between protection voltage and synchronism voltage
27 u_Diff Voltage difference between protection voltage and synchronism voltage
28 25.Ok_Chk Output signal of indicating that check condition for AR is met
29 25.Ok_SynChk Output signal of indicating that synchronism check is met
30 25.Ok_DdChk Output signal of indicating that dead check is met
Output signal of indicating that voltage difference condition of synchronism
31 25.Ok_UDiff
check for AR is met
Output signal of indicating that frequency difference condition of
32 25.Ok_fDiff
synchronism check for AR is met
Output signal of indicating that phase difference condition of synchronism
33 25.Ok_phiDiff
check for AR is met
Output signal of indicating that line voltage is greater than the setting
34 25.Chk_LvL
[25.U_Lv]
Output signal of indicating that line voltage is smaller than the setting
35 25.Chk_DdL
[25.U_Dd]
Output signal of indicating that bus voltage is greater than the setting
36 25.Chk_LvB
[25.U_Lv]
Output signal of indicating that bus voltage is smaller than the setting
37 25.Chk_DdB
[25.U_Dd]
38 25.Ok_DdL_DdB Output signal of indicating that dead line and dead bus condition is met
39 25.Ok_DdL_LvB Output signal of indicating that dead line and live bus condition is met
40 25.Ok_LvL_DdB Output signal of indication that live line and dead bus condition is met
Alarm signal of indicating that synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (line
41 25.Alm_VTS_UB
voltage used as synchronism voltage)
Alarm signal of indicating that synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (bus
42 25.Alm_VTS_UL
voltage used as synchronism voltage)
Auto-reclosure
43 79.N_Rcls Total number of AR
44 79.N_1PS1 Output signal of first 1-pole AR
45 79.N_3PS1 Output signal of first 3-pole AR
46 79.N_3PS2 Output signal of second 3-pole AR
47 79.N_3PS3 Output signal of third 3-pole AR
48 79.N_3PS4 Output signal of fourth 3-pole AR
49 79.On Output signal of indicating that AR is enabled
50 79.Off Output signal of indicating that AR is disabled
51 79.Close Output signal of indicating that AR operates

Date: 2011-04-20
52 79.Ready Output signal of indicating that AR have been ready for reclosing cycle
53 79.AR_Blkd Output signal of indicating that AR is blocked
54 79.Active Output signal of indicating that AR logic is actived
55 79.Inprog Output signal of indicating that AR cycle is in progress
56 79.Inprog_1P Output signal of indicating that 1-pole AR cycle is in progress
57 79.Inprog_3P Output signal of indicating that 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
58 79.Inprog_3PS1 Output signal of indicating that first 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
59 79.Inprog_3PS2 Output signal of indicating that second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
60 79.Inprog_3PS3 Output signal of indicating that third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
61 79.Inprog_3PS4 Output signal of indicating that fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
Output signal of waiting reclosing to be sent to slave AR (when reclosing
62 79.WaitToSlave
dual circuit breakers)
Output signal of permitting single-phase tripping once there is any
63 79.Prem_Trp1P
protection element operating
Output signal of only permitting three-phase tripping once there is any
64 79.Prem_Trp3P
protection element operating
65 79.Fail Output signal of indicating that auto-reclosing fails
66 79.FPR Output signal of indicating that faulty phase selection fails
67 79.Fail_Syn Output signal of indicating that synchronism check for AR fails
68 79.Mode_1PAR Output signal of 1-pole AR mode
69 79.Mode_3PAR Output signal of 3-pole AR mode
70 79.Mode_1/3PAR Output signal of 1/3-pole AR mode
Tripping Logic
71 TrpA Output signal of tripping A-phase
72 TrpB Output signal of tripping B-phase
73 TrpC Output signal of tripping C-phase
74 Trp Output signal of tripping any phase
75 Trp3P Output signal of tripping three-phase
76 BFI_A Output signal of A-phase breaker failure initiation
77 BFI_B Output signal of B-phase breaker failure initiation
78 BFI_C Output signal of C-phase breaker failure initiation
79 VTS.Alm Alarm signal of indicating that VT circuit is abnormal
CT Circuit Supervision
80 CTS.Alm Alarm signal of indicating that CT circuit is abnormal

Date: 2011-04-20

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
10 Communications
Table of Contents
10 Communications .......................................................................... 10-a
10.1 General Description .................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface .......................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer .............................................................................. 10-4
10.3.2 Initialization .................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.3 Time Synchronization ..................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.5 General Interrogation ..................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.6 General Service ............................................................................................................. 10-5
10.3.7 Disturbance Records ..................................................................................................... 10-5
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet .................................................... 10-6

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6
10.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-6
10.5.2 Communication profiles ................................................................................................. 10-7
10.5.3 Server data organization ................................................................................................ 10-8
10.5.4 Server features and configuration ................................................................................ 10-10
10.5.5 ACSI Conformance ...................................................................................................... 10-12
10.5.6 Logical Nodes .............................................................................................................. 10-16
10.6 GOOSE Service ......................................................................................... 10-18

10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction .................................................................................................... 10-18
10.6.2 GOOSE Function ......................................................................................................... 10-19

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
10.7 DNP3.0 Interface ....................................................................................... 10-20

10.7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 10-20
10.7.2 Link Layer Functions .................................................................................................... 10-20
10.7.3 Transport Functions ..................................................................................................... 10-20
10.7.4 Application Layer Functions ......................................................................................... 10-20
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements.....................................................10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable .......................................................................10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................10-3

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485
serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a
remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
EIA RS-485
Master 120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Slave Slave Slave
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that
is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop
bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.
Note!

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will
result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume responsibility for
any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect
application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs)
as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the menu “Settings→Device
Setup→Comm Settings”.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each equipment is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a
star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
also connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment
which has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.
SCADA
Exchanger A
Exchanger B
Equipment Equipment Equipment
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103
protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports
to use an Ethernet connection. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings to the protective
device must be configured.
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface with the
protective device as the slave device. It is properly developed by NR.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
 Initialization (reset)
 Time synchronization
 Event record extraction
 General interrogation
 General commands
 Disturbance records
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
Whenever the protective device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective
device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference
is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The protective device time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The protective device will correct for the transmission delay as specified
in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then
the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message
is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization
class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to
set the protective device time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via
the interface will cause the protective device to create an event with the current date and time
taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized using the following information:
 Type identification (TYP)
 Function type (FUN)
 Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operating elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary signal and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause
of transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
All spontaneous events can be gained by printing, implementing submenu “IEC103 Info” in the
menu “Print”.
10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.6 General Service

The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the
protective device, and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and
ASDU 10. For more details about generic functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
All general classification service group numbers can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
“IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to eight disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault
detector or an operation of the relay can make the protective device store the disturbance records.

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
“IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. It is properly developed by NR too. All the service of this relay is based on generic
functions of the IEC60870-5-103. The following table lists all the group number of this relay. And
this relay will send all the relevant information about group caption to the SAS or RTU after
establishing a successful communication link.
Group Number Group Caption Description

0 Device Description
1 Device Parameter
2 Setting Group
3 Setting
6 Virtual Enabling BI
9 Measurement
10 Fault Data
11 Net Setting
12 Enabling BI
13 Operation Element
14 Alarm Info
15 Disturbance Info List
10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol
10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
 IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
 IEC 61850-2: Glossary
 IEC 61850-3: General requirements
 IEC 61850-4: System and project management
 IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
 IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
 IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Principles and models
 IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
Common data classes
Compatible logical node classes and data classes
 IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.5.2 Communication profiles

The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish
communications. These addresses are located in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm
Settings”.
1. MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2. Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.
3. Peer-to-peer

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.
4. Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IED
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.
10.5.3 Server data organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information
about the IED logical device.
10.5.3.1 Digital status values
The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.5.3.2 Analog values
Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:
 MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
10.5.3.3 Protection logical nodes
The following list describes the protection elements for PCS-921 series relays. The specified relay
will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
 PPDP: Pole discrepancy
 PTOC: phase overcurrent, zero sequence overcurrent
 PSCH: Protection scheme
 RBRF:Breaker failure
 RREC: automatic reclosing
 RSYN: Synchronism-check
 RFLO: Fault locator
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PTOC1 is “PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For
PCS-921 series relays protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for
the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and BRCB also locates in LLN0.
10.5.3.4 LLN0 and other logical nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:
 MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands
such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and
current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power
flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested
accuracy for these functions has to be provided.
 LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
 PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to
a new “operate” of PTRC.
 RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output refers
to the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System”
(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording, independently of the
trigger mode.
10.5.4 Server features and configuration

10.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
 TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
 OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation
 IntgPd: Integrity period.
10.5.4.2 File transfer
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-900 series relay.
10.5.4.3 Timestamps
The Universal Time Coordinated(UTC for short) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data
items represents the lastest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.5.4.4 Logical node name prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
 A five or six-character name prefix.
 A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
 A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
10.5.4.5 GOOSE services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE VEBI
settings in device.
The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
The general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1. Configure the data.
2. Configure the transmission dataset.
3. Configure the GOOSE service settings.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1. Configure the data.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings
3. Configure the reception data
10.5.5 ACSI Conformance

10.5.5.1 ACSI basic conformance statement
Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used N N Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used N N N
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.5.5.2 ACSI models conformance statement
Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.5.5.3 ACSI Services conformance statement
Service Server/Publisher PCS-921

Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y

S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y
10.5.6 Logical Nodes

10.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table
The PCS-921 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes PCS-921 Series

L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential －
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance －
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme YES
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency －
PTOV: Overvoltage －
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload －
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PPDP: Pole discrepancy YES

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
PTUV: Undervoltage －
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator YES
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing YES
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking －
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller －
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements －
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering －

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
MMXN: Non phase related measurement －

MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance －
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.6 GOOSE Service
10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction

The General Object oriented substation event (GOOSE) defined in IEC61850 standard is based
on the fast Ethernet multi-broadcasting message transmission, taking place of the hard-wired
communication mode between classic intelligent electronic device (IED) and providing a fast,
efficient and reliable method for communication among logic nodes.

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
The GOOSE service supports the exchange of public data comprised of data sets, it is used to
protect the data transmission which requires high real-time like tripping, breaker position and
interlocked information. The information exchange of GOOSE service is based on the
publish/subscribe mechanism, and any IED device in the same GOOSE network can be
conducted as subscription terminal to receive data and as publication terminal to provide
data to other IED device as well, so that the increasing or modification of communication data
between IED devices can be realized in a much easier way.
10.6.2 GOOSE Function

The PCS-921 series devices use independent high efficient DSP board to realize GOOSE, so it
has super-high real-time property and reliability. Two 100M FDX optical fiber Ethernet interfaces
on the DSP board can be corresponded to different VLAN networks. The GOOSE dual-networks
configuration improves the reliability and stability of system.
1. GOOSE receiving/sending mechanism
In order to ensure the real-time property and reliability of GOOSE service, GOOSE message
adopts ASN.1 code which relates to basic encoding rule (BER) and transmit data directly in
Ethernet link layer without passing through TCP/IP protocol and also adopts special
receiving/sending mechanism.
Sending of the GOOSE message adopts heartbeat message and position-altering message fast
resending combination mechanism. If the data in GOOSE data sets is not changed, the heartbeat
message whose interval is T0 will be sent, the status number (stnum) in message will not be
changed and the sequence number (sqnum) will be increased progressively. If the data in GOOSE
data set is changed, after sending a frame of position-altering message, the position-altering
message will be fast resent in the interval of T0, T1, T2, and T3. The status number (stnum) in the
message whose data is position-altered will be increased, and the sequence number (sqnum) will
be started from zero.
The GOOSE receiving can detect link interrupt according to the TATL (Time Allow to Live) in the
GOOSE message. The GOOSE data receiving mechanism can be divided into single frame
receiving and dual-frames receiving. The intelligent operation box uses dual-frames receiving
mechanism and update data after receiving two frames of messages with the same GOOSE data.
Other protection and monitoring devices use single frame receiving mechanism and update data
immediately after receiving position-altering message (stnum changed). If the status number
(stnum) in the received message is not changed, dual-frames message confirmation will be used
to update data.
2. GOOSE Alarm
GOOSE will alarm the abnormal conditions produced during receiving/sending process, the
GOOSE alarms mainly include: GOOSE network A/B network link breaking alarm, GOOSE
configuration inconformity alarm and GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm.
The GOOSE network A/B link breaking alarm is: this alarm will be produced when correct GOOSE
message is not received in 2 times of the TATL (Time Allow to Live).

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
The GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm is: the attribute of GOOSE control block of GOOSE
publisher and subscriber like configuration version number must be identical. Otherwise this
GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm will be produced.
The GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm is: when network-storm is produced in GOOSE
network, if data flow of network port is beyond normal range and abnormal message is produced,
this GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm will be produced.
3. GOOSE Service
When service status of the device is set to 1, the GOOSE message sent by the device has a Test
Flag and receiving terminal can obtain service status of sending terminal by the test flag of
message. When the service status of sending terminal conforms to that of receiving terminal, the
device will carry out normal processing to the received GOOSE data. When the service status of
sending terminal doesn’t conform to that of receiving terminal, the device will process the received
GOOSE data accordingly to ensure that the serviced device will not influence the normal running
of device, improving the flexibility and reliability of GOOSE service.
10.7 DNP3.0 Interface
10.7.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the EIA RS-485 at the rear of this relay.
The data format is 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity bit and 1 stop bit.
10.7.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.7.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.7.4 Application Layer Functions

10.7.4.1 Time Synchronization
1. Time delay measurement
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Master 0x17 - - -
Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07
2. Read time of device

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications

Master 0x01 0x34 0x00, 0x01 0x04-
Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07
3. Write time of device

Master 0x02 0x32 0x01 0x00, 0x01, 0x07, 0x08
Slave 0x81 - - -
10.7.4.2 Supported Writing Functions
1. Write time of device
See Section 10.7.4.1 for the details.
2. Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)

Master 0x02 0x50 0x01 0x00, 0x01
Slave 0x81 - - -
10.7.4.3 Supported Reading Functions
1. Supported qualifiers
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x06 0x07 0x08

Slave Variation 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x07 0x08
2. Supported objects and variations
 Object 1, Binary inputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02
The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are
transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.
 Object 2, SOE
Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03

Slave Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03
If the master qualifier is “0x07”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x27”; and if the master
qualifier is “0x01”, “0x06” or “0x08”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x28”.
 Object 30, Analog inputs
Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

Slave Qualifier 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04
The metering values are transported firstly, and then the protection measurement values are
transported.

Date: 2011-04-20
10 Communications
 Object 40, Analog outputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02
The protection settings are transported in this object.
 Object 50, Time Synchronization
See Section 10.7.4.1 for the details.
3. Class 0 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 0 data request and the variation is “0x01”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 30” and “Object 40” (see
“Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.7.4.3).
4. Class 1 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 1 data request and the variation is “0x02”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 2” (see “Supported objects and
variations” in Section 10.7.4.3).
5. Multiple object request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the multiple object request and the variation is “0x01”,
“0x02”, “0x03” and “0x04”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 2”, “Object 30” and “Object
40” (see “Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.7.4.3).
10.7.4.4 Remote Control Functions
The function code 0x03 and 0x04 are supported in this relay. The function code 0x03 is for the
remote control with selection; and the function code 0x04 is for the remote control with execution.
The selection operation must be executed before the execution operation, and the single point
control object can be supported to this relay.
Master Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28

Slave Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28
The “Object 12” is for the remote control functions.
Master Variation 0x01 0x01: closing

Control Code
Slave Variation 0x01 0x10: tripping

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11 Installation .................................................................................... 11-a
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.3 Checking Shipment ...................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Material and Tools Required........................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions.................................................. 11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-4
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .................................................................................................... 11-4
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ......................................................................................................... 11-4
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ................................................................................. 11-5
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation............................................................................ 11-6
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring ...................................................................................................... 11-6
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ............................................................................................ 11-7
List of Figures
Figure 12.5-1 Dimensions of PCS-921 ................................................................................... 11-3
Figure 12.5-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921 ................................................................................. 11-3
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-4
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ............................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay ........................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination .......................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-7

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
DANGER! Only insert or withdraw the PWR module while the power supply is switched
off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
WARNING! Only insert or withdraw other modules while the power supply is switched off.
WARNING! The modules may only be inserted in the slots designated in Section 6.2.
Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.
DANGER! Improper handling of the equipment can cause damage or an incorrect
response of the equipment itself or the primary plant.
WARNING! Industry packs and ribbon cables may only be replaced or the positions of
jumpers be changed on a workbench appropriately designed for working on electronic

equipment. The modules, bus backplanes are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when
not in the unit's housing.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
 Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
 Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Checking Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.
11.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of
high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
(visibility of markings).
WARNING! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of
this relay.
11.6 Mechanical Installation

The device adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral
faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-921 series is IEC
4U high and 19” wide. Figure 11.6-1 shows its dimensions and Figure 11.6-2 shows the panel
cut-out.
482.6
291 465.0
101.6
177.0
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-921
465.0
101.6
179.0
4-Ф6.8
450.0
Figure 11.6-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921
NOTE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle
for heat emission of this relay.

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 11.2 for
the details.
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
NOTE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission
of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
 Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2
 Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
 AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
 AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 4.0mm2
 Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable
 Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables

A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.
01 02
03 04
Tighten 05 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
01
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables
DANGER! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.

Date: 2011-04-20
11 Installation

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12 Commissioning ............................................................................ 12-a
12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2
12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized ......................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized............................................................................................... 12-5
12.5.3 Print Fault Report ........................................................................................................... 12-7
12.5.4 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................. 12-7
12.6 Final Checks ................................................................................................ 12-8

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
12.1 Overview
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well
as with the applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
 The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
 Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
 Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
 The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
 When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected.

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar
with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
12.3 Commission Tools

Minimum equipment required:
 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
 Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
 Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
 Phase angle meter.
 Phase rotation meter.
NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
 An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
 A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
 EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
 PCS-900 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-2000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
12.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
 Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
 User interfaces test
 Binary input circuits and output circuits test
 AC input circuits test
 Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
 Measuring elements test
 Timers test
 Measurement and recording test
 Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
 On load test.
 Phase sequence check and polarity check.

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.
 Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
 Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
 Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
 Device plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
 Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
 Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
 Voltage transformer circuits
 Current transformer circuits
 DC power supply

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
 Optic-isolated control inputs
 Output contacts
 Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating
ranges in Chapter “Technical Data”.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.
12.5.2.4 Testing HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “ALARM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.6 Testing AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.7 Testing Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized
input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the Insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.3 Print Fault Report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips
12.5.4 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:
 Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
 Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

Date: 2011-04-20
12 Commissioning
 Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.6 Final Checks
After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Date: 2011-04-20
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13 Maintenance ................................................................................. 13-a
13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ......................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-1
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-3
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-3

Date: 2011-04-20
13 Maintenance

Date: 2011-04-20
13 Maintenance
NR numerical relay PCS-921 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and
signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output
relays are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.1 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv Events” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
 Test circuit connections are correct
 Modules are securely inserted in position
 Correct DC power voltage is applied
 Correct AC inputs are applied
 Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual
13.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can

Date: 2011-04-20
13 Maintenance
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the CPU module replaced
should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have
the same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Version Info”.
Caution!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
1) Replacing a module
 Switch off the DC power supply
 Disconnect the trip outputs
 Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
 Unscrew the module.
Warning!
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
 Open the relay front panel
 Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
 Detach the HMI module from the relay
 Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
3) Replacing the AI, PWR, CPU, BI or BO module
 Unscrew the module connector
 Unplug the connector from the target module.
 Unscrew the module.
 Pull out the module

Date: 2011-04-20
13 Maintenance
 Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
 After replacing the CPU module, input the application-specific setting values again.
Warning!
Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.
Warning!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
Danger!
After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.
13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40oC to +70oC, but the temperature of from 0oC
to +40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

Date: 2011-04-20
13 Maintenance

Date: 2011-04-20
Table of Contents
14 Decommissioning and Disposal................................................. 14-a
14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-1

Date: 2011-04-20

Date: 2011-04-20
14.1 Decommissioning
1. Switching off
To switch off the PCS-921, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2. Disconnecting Cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
Danger!
Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the DC module of the
PCS-921, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.
Danger!
Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.
3. Dismantling
The PCS-921 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
Danger!
When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
14.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
Note!
Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

Date: 2011-04-20

Date: 2011-04-20

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
R1.00 R1.00 2011-04-20 Form the original manual.

Date: 2011-04-20

Date: 2011-04-20

PCS-921 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R1.00 (X)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-921 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R1.00 (X)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-921

Breaker Failure Protection

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection i

ii PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Version: R1.00 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

P/N: Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com

Copyright © NR 2011. All rights reserved Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection iii

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

5 Meaurement and Recording

8 Human Machine Interface

iv PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following symbols are used in drawings:

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection v

communication media by software tool

---xxx is the symbol

vi PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-a

1-b PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921

No. Function ANSI

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Pole discrepancy protection (62PD)

 Dead zone protection (50DZ)

 Two stages overcurrent protection (50/51P)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-1

 Two stages earth-fault protection (50/51G)

 User programmable logic

 DC power supply supervision

 Voltage and current drift auto regulation

 Number of circuit breaker operation (single-phase tripping, three-phase tripping and

 1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization

1-2 PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

IEC 60870-5-103 over TCP/IP

 GOOSE communication function (optional plug-in module)

 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting

 1 RS-232 or RS-485 rear ports for printer

 Language switchover – English+ selected language

 Auxiliary software - PCSPC

 High-performance hardware platform and modularized design, MCU (management control

 Multiple setting groups with password protection

1.4 Order Information

Description and Option S1 S2 S3 − H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-3

1-4 PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

33 contacts (22 contacts

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-5

1-6 PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2.1.2 AC Voltage Input ................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1.3 Power Supply ..................................................................................................................... 2-1